Home

Samsung 3000 Digital Camera User Manual

1. 4 1 DCS INTRODUCTION COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 Part 1 Introduction to Programming This manual describes the MMC programming required for the following types of Sam sung DCS keyphone system DCS DCS Compact Compact I DCS Compact Il DCS 816 DCS 408 DCS 408i In this manual these systems are referred to as DCS Compact CI Compact Il CII 816 408 and 4081 respectively Programming requirements for these system types are generally the same but occasionally there are differences Users of 408 and 408i systems should also read Programming DCS 408 and 408i Systems in section 1 5 4 of this manual Unless otherwise stated references to DCS include Compact I sys tems The different system types are discussed fully in the separate Samsung General De scription manuals for each system where these have been published Software Version Numbers The software version numbers of the systems for which this programming manual is relevant are DCS and Compact ll2V6 10 or later 8162 V1 09 or later 408 and 408i 1 04 or later 1 1 Using This Manual e tis recommended that you read the whole of Part 1 of this manual which provides a useful overview to MMC programming procedures e Fora comprehensive list of available MMCs see Part 2 e For quick reference Part 2 also provides a table listing the default settings for each MMC and indicating which systems can use each MMC
2. STATION VOLUME SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE ALARM AND MESSAGE SET CLIP DISPLAY _ O KEYSET LANGUAGE OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODES ASSIGN UA DEVICE COMMON BELL CONTROL ASSIGN LOUD BELL 206 BARGE IN TYPE 207 ASSIGNVM AAPORT _ 208 ASSIGN RING TYPE ASSIGN ADD ON MODULE CUSTOMER ON OFF DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT ALARM RINGING STATION ALARM MESSAGE _ DISA ALARM RINGING STATION VOICE DIALLER OPTIONS VOICE DIALLER ASSIGNMENTS CCC OPTION OO O COMMON RELAY SERVICE TYPE _ ISDN SERVICETYPE 0 0 CUSTOMER ON OFF PER STATION ASSIGN STATION COS PICKUP GROUPS 1 i O ASSIGN BOSS SECRETARY ASSIGNSTATIONTRUNKUSE ASSIGNFORCEDCODE HOTLINE 2 ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE ASSIGN STATION MUSIC ON HOLD 0 2 LCRCLASSOFSERVICE ASSIGN SIM PARAMETER ALLOW CLIP _ 000 ASSIGN PIN CODE CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL SET RELOCATION COPY STATION USABLE N NIN N m NINN NI Ny oluji olu BS w w w w w BW w w ojo CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL COPY COS CONTENTS SET RELOCATION ASSIGN COS CONTENTS 6 COPY STATION USABLE TOLL DENY TABLE GJ Gy GU L
3. map only one port to each number This means you cant use the same number in more than one BRI access However more than one number can be mapped onto a port and used in a BRI ac cess PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 424 7801 SO MAPPING Display shows NONE 2 Dial an ISDN terminal number e g 7803 7803 SO MAPPING Of NONE Press UP or DOWN key to select the number and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Dial ISDN station number e g 703 7803 SO MAPPING OR 703 Press UP or DOWN key to select the number and press RIGHT soft key 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data NONE Related Items MMC 419 BRI Option MMC 423 S T Mode MMC 424 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 426 TRUNK GAIN CONTROL bes x cm v 816 7 408i v 408 V This MMC procedure allows trunk gain control PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL trunks ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programm
4. DID BSY ROUT DDI calls to a busy extension can be routed to an as signed destination in MMC 406 before the call is s 4081 only dropped DID NOT ROUT DDI calls with no mapping in MMC 714 can be routed to 7 s an assigned destination in MMC 406 ALL PICK UP Independent pickup group can pick up all calls ARD TONE CHK When system detects CO BUSY TONE from Central Of 7 7 7 fice it returns to autoredial state VPN ENABLE Allows use of VPN Virtual Private Network feature linked with network For future use 408 ISDNTRK BUSY Allows busy tone to be returned to incoming DDI calls to station group if all group members are busy Sequential x 408i only or distribute groups only ISDN KEYFAC ISDN Key Facility 408i only MMC 210 Page 1 of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 210 TEN ON AND OFF Display shows DISA PSWD ON 2 Dial option number e g 01 TEN ON AND OFF OR LCR ENABLE OFF Press UP or DOWN to select option Press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Dial 1forON or 0 for OFF TEN ON AND OFF OR LCR ENABLE ON Press UP or DOWN to make selection and press RIGHT soft key 4 Repeat steps 2 3 for other options OR Press TRSF to store and
5. EN61000 3 2 1995 Inc A1 A2 1998 EN61000 3 3 1995 EN61000 4 2 1995 Inc A1 1998 EN61000 4 3 1996 Inc A1 1998 EN61000 4 4 1995 EN61000 4 5 1995 EN61000 4 6 1996 EN61000 4 8 1993 EN61000 4 11 1994 AS NZS3548 1995 60950 1992 A1 A2 A3 A4 A11 DELLI Manufacturer Samsung Electronics Co Ltd 259 Gongdan Dong Gumi City Kyungbuk Korea 730 030 2001 03 31 TE Jang Tae eok Jang General Manager place and date of issue Representative in the EU Samsung Electronics Euro QA Lab Blackbushe Business Park Saxony Way Yateley Hampshire GU46 6GG UK 2001 04 03 place and date of issue name and signature of authorized person EU Declaration of Conformity For other directives relevant to DCS Compact II DCS 816 DCS 408 and DCS 4081 systems refer to the Samsung website at www samsung telecoms co uk DCS CONTENTS EOMBNEBEBOSRAMMINOREANUSER _ NONESBERSEDUTE Contents Part 1 Introduction to Programming 1 1 gs eee ge wiis Mali balb s oct ob let et eite 1 1 12 Programming OVGrvieW coeere ree t tide re teet teer 1 2 1 3 Programming Levels ves caecedes ise ep 1 2 1 3 System Ee velo s eeu ats er ife 1 2 1 3 2 Customer Level eo
6. 000 AA CALER 001 ALM CLR 002 AUTO RDL 003 CALLBACK 004 CLIP ABN 005 CLIP INQ 006 CLIP INV 007 CONFER 008 DALM CLR 009 DAY NIG 010 DIRECT 012 DND 013 DND OVRD 015 DOOR 016 DSS 017 DTS 018 2 019 EXT FWD 020 FEATURE 021 FLASH 022 FOLLOW ME 023 FORWARD 024 025 GRP 026 HOLD 027 HOT LINE 028 INTERCOM 029 MESSAGE 030 MM PAGE 031 NEW CALL 032 OHVAED 033 OHVAING 034 ONEA2 035 OPERATOR 036 OUT TRSF 037 OVERRIDE 038 PAGE 0 Auto answer control by caller Alarm sensor ring answer Retry on busy Callback CLIP abandoned CLIP inquiry for review CLIP investigate Conference DISA alarm ring clear Change day night mode Directory dial Do Not Disturb DND Override Door ring answer Direct station select Directtrunk select Not used External call forward Feature key Trunk flash Follow Me call forward Call forward Not used Group in out Hold Hotline Intercom call Message Meet me page New call OHVAed OHVAing 1A2 emulation Operator Outgoing transfer Executive Override Page zone 0 PAGING MMC 701 Page 5 of 7 DCS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL 039 PAGE 1 040 PAGE 2 041 PAGE 3 042 PAGE 4 043 PAGE 5 044 047 048 049 PICKUP 050 SECURE 051 SSPD TOL 052 STN LOCK 053 STNGRP 01 054 STNGRP 02 055 STNGRP 03 056 STNGRP 04 057 STNGRP 05 058 STNGRP 06 059 STNGRP 07 060 STNGRP 08 061 STNGRP 09 062 STNGRP 10 063 083 084 SYS SPD 085 086 TRKGRPO1 087 TRKGRP02 08
7. D 500 500 3 Enter new DAY selection via dial keypad e g 301 210 DOOR RING OR D 301 500 Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key 4 Enter new NIGHT selection via dial keypad e g 302 210 DOOR RING OR D 301 N 302 Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key 5 Press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 OR Press LEFT soft key to return to step 3 OR Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data Station group 500 for day and night group 50 for 408 408i systems Related Items None MMC 211 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 212 ALARM RINGING STATION NEN EE Used to determine which devices will be alerted when an alarm sensor is activated Device DCS Compact II Station 201 349 201 308 Station group 500 529 500 519 The above devices will ring like a doorphone and follow the door ring time out When ringing display keysets show the display assigned in MMC 213 Alarm Message The bottom line of the keyset display gives an option to clear the alarm Ringing initiated by an alarm sensor is an swered by going off hook and on hook again at a ringing keyset If a device such as Ring Over Page or a common bell is the only device assigned to ring it may be answered by assigning a direct pickup key with this device as the extender If
8. Press UP or DOWN Press RIGHT soft key 6 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data Table 01 001 01 0 500 002 02 2 B 003 03 3 5B 004 04 5 B 005 05 7 gt B 006 06 9 gt Related Items MMC 733 AA Plan Table MMC 732 Page 2 of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 733 PLAN TABLE Des c X cm V 816 V 408 X 408 X Used to call up the customer recorded and pre recorded messages into plans compiled in MMC 732 AA Translation Table Pre recorded messages listed below can be applied and destinations can be programmed as required Specific ports are programmed in MMC 735 AA Use Table There are a total of 64 messages on an AA card 48 messages are to be recorded by the user 01 48 16 messages are pre recorded in ROM on the card 49 64 Options are as follows Dial Option Value Description 00 DAY MSG 01 64 Introduction message during Day Mode 01 NIGHT MSG 01 64 Introduction message during Night Mode 02 ALTER MSG 01 64 Emergency message 03 INVLID MSG 01 64 Message when an invalid digit is dialled 04 ANS MSG 01 64 Message when there is no reply from the destination 05 XFER MSG 01 64 Transfer notifying message 06 BUSY MSG 01 64 Message on busy reply 07 NO STN MSG 01 64 Message on retrial 08 NO ACT MSG 01 64 Message on no action
9. COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL MMC 725 MMC PROGRAMS NOVEMBER 2001 SMDR OPTIONS Allows the system administrator to select the information to be printed on the SMDR report The following options may be selected All have YES NO options YES print except where a new value or directory name is required 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 13 14 PAGE HEADER LINE PER PAGE INCOMING CALL OUTGOING CALL AUTHORISE CODE SMDR START TIME IN OUT GROUP DND CALL WAKE UP CALL DIRECTORY NAME CALLER ID DATA ABANDON CALL NO OF DIAL MASK DID NUM NAME Determines whether a page header prints at the top of each page This would normally be turned off if SMDR is being sent to a call accounting machine Selects the length of each page to determine when to print the SMDR header The number of lines is in the range 01 99 Determines whether incoming calls printon SMDR Determines whether outgoing calls printon SMDR Determines whether authorisation codes printon SMDR Determines whether valid calls will include the minimum call time in total call duration set in MMC 501 Allows a message IN GROUP or OUT GROUP to be printed in the Digits Dialled column each time a station enters or leaves a group Allows a message DND ON or DND OFF to be printed in the Digits Dialled column each time a station enters or leaves DND Determines whether stations receiving an alarm reminder call printon
10. Des c 7 V 816 X 408 X 408 X Assigns the VDIAL card with two 2 channels and seven 7 users or one 1 channel and five 5 us ers When changing channel size you will be prompted to clear RAM This is only for Voice Dialler not the system This will prevent accidental usage of pre recorded names It is advised that you clear RAM before assigning users in MMC 216 Voice Dialler Assignments VDIAL cards are numbered with odd numbers For example the first VDIAL card in the system is numbered 3551 DCS or 355 Compact 1 The second channel if used will be numbered 3552 or 356 The second VDIAL card is numbered 3553 or 357 and a second channel 3554 or 358 If only one channel is assigned the even number 3552 or 3554 356 or 358 will not appear in MMC 216 Option 0 2CH 7USER 20BIN 7 USERS 1 1CH 5USER 40BIN 5USERS PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 215 3551 VDIALER OPTN Display shows 3551 for DCS or 355 for CII 2CH 7USER 20BIN e g 3551 2 Enter Voice Dialler number e g 3552 via dial keypad 3552 VDIALER OPTN OR 2CH 7USER 20BIN Press UP or DOWN key to make selection Press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Select channel option by pressing UP or DOWN key to 3552 VDIALER OPTN view selecti
11. SAMSUNG DCS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL for DCS DCS COMPACT DCS COMPACT II 5 816 DCS 408 DCS 408i ai TELECOMS Publication nformation Samsung Telecoms reserves the right without prior notice to revise information in this publication for any reason Samsung Telecoms also reserves the right without prior notice to make changes in design or components of equipment as engineering and manufacturing may warrant Disclaimer Samsung Telecoms is not responsible for errors or problems arising from customers not installing programming or operating their Samsung systems as described in this manual Copyright 2001 Samsung Telecoms UK Limited All rights reserved No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or by any means graphic electronic or mechanical including recording taping photocopy or information retrieval system without express written permission of the publisher of this material Part No 12623 Version 2 0 ELECTRONICS EU Declaration of Conformity RTTE Samsung Electroni 259 Gongdan Dong Gumi City Kyungbuk Korea 730 030 factory name address declare under our sole responsibility that the product Digital Keyphone System DCS to which this declaration relates is in conformity with RTTE Directive 1999 5 EC Annex Il Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC EMC Directive 89 336 EEC 92 31 EEC By application of the following standards EN55022 1998 Inc A1 2000
12. disables the auto logout option when the RING NEXT timer is set RANGE FIRST MSG 01 64 SECOND MSG 01 64 EXIT CODE NONE 0 9 RETRY COUNT 00 99 FINAL DESTINATION NONE STATION STATION GRP AA PLAN NO 01 12 RING NEXT 00 99 sec UCD RECALL 00 99 sec MOH SOURCE TONE NONE Port No WRAP UP 000 250 sec AUTO LOGOUT YES NO MMC 607 Page 1 of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 607 0110 GROUP Display shows FIRST MSG 61 2 Dial UCD group number e g 502 502 UCD GROUP OR FIRST MSG 61 Press UP or DOWN key to select number Press RIGHT soft key 3 Dial option number from above list e g 1 502 UCD GROUP OR SECOND MSG 62 Press UP or DOWN key to select option Press RIGHT soft key 4 Enter new value using dial keypad e g 01 502 UCD GROUP OR SECOND MSG 01 Press UP or DOWN key to select value Press RIGHT soft key 5 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data FIRST MSG 61 SECOND MSG 62 EXIT CODE None RETRY COUNT 03 FINAL DEST 500 RING NEXT 30 sec UCD RECALL 10sec MOH SOURCE Tone WRAP UP 10 sec AUTO LOGOUT No Related Items MMC 601 Assign Station Group MMC 607 Page 2 of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 608 ASSIGN CLIP REVIEW BLOCK Epes 7 17 cm 7 s16 v 408 V 408 X
13. 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 084 085 086 087 088 DND OVRD DOOR DSS DTS EXT FWD FEATURE FLASH FOLLOW ME FORWARD GRP HOLD HOT LINE INTERCOM MESSAGE MM PAGE NEW CALL OHVAED OHVAING ONEA2 OPERATOR OUT TRSF OVERRIDE PAGE 0 PAGE 1 PAGE 2 PAGE 3 PAGE 4 PAGE 5 PAGE 6 PAGE 7 PAGE 8 PAGE 9 PAGE PICKUP SECURE SSPD TOL STN LOCK STNGRP 01 STNGRP 02 STNGRP 03 STNGRP 04 STNGRP 05 STNGRP 06 STNGRP 07 STNGRP 08 STNGRP 09 STNGRP 10 STNGRP 11 STNGRP 12 STNGRP 13 STNGRP 14 STNGRP 15 STNGRP 16 STNGRP 17 STNGRP 18 STNGRP 19 STNGRP 20 SYS SPD TRKGRPO1 TRKGRPO2 DND Override Door ring answer Direct station select Direct trunk select Not used External call forward Feature key Trunk flash Follow Me call forward Call forward Not used Group in out Hold Hotline Intercom call Message Meet me page New call OHVAed OHVAing 1A2 emulation Operator Outgoing transfer Executive Override Page zone 0 PAGING Page zone 1 PAGING Page zone 2 PAGING Page zone 3 PAGING Page zone 4 PAGING Page zone 5 PAGING Page zone 6 PAGING Page zone 7 PAGING Page zone 8 PAGING Page zone 9 PAGING Page zone Call pickup Override secure System speed dial toll check Station locking Station group 01 calling Station group 02 calling Station group 03 calling Station group 04 calling Station group 05 calling Station group 06 calling Station group 07
14. 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data MSG index number Related Items None MMC 734 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 735 AA USE TABLE Des 7 a x cm v V 408 x 408 Assigns an AA PLAN TABLE to either an individual AA port or an AA group AA Plan Numbers are in the range 01 to 12 Note that AA card port numbers differ between systems see Part 2 section 2 3 System Configu ration Quick Reference PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 735 381 AA PLAN Display shows e g for Compact II PLAN NO 01 2 Dial AA number or AA group pilot number e g 382 382 AA PLAN OR PLAN NO 01 Press UP or DOWN to select and press RIGHT soft key 3 Dial AA PLAN number e g 02 382 AA PLAN OR PLAN NO 02 Press UP or DOWN to select and press RIGHT soft key 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data Plan 01 Related Items None MMC 735 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 736 ASSIGN pcs c 7 816 408 x 408 X Allows an A
15. Default Data DIAL YES ANS YES Related Items MMC 316 Copy Station Usable MMC 406 Trunk Ring Assignment MMC 722 Station Key Programming MMC 723 System Key Programming MMC 304 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 305 ASSIGN FORCED CODE Allows the assignment of either account or authorisation codes on a per station basis or on an all station basis PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC ANS RLS Used to select ALL FEATURE KEYS 0 NONE 1 AUTHORISE CODE 2 ACCOUNT CODE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 305 201 FORCD CODE Display shows NONE 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 FORCD CODE OR NONE Press UP or DOWN key to select station and press OR RIGHT soft key to move cursor OR Press ANS RLS to select all stations ALL 3 Dial a feature option 0 2 0 2 205 FORCD CODE OR ACCOUNT CODE Press UP or DOWN key to select option and press RIGHT soft key to return step 2 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data None Related Items MMC 707 Authorisation Code MMC 708 Account Code MMC 305 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 306 HOT LINE Allows a station to make an automatic internal or ext
16. Operation ISDN features supported Note 1 This document is based on BRI and PRI V2 0 Nov 4 1996 or later Therefore some fea tures are not applicable to the old version 2 Main CPU software versions required are 4 0 or later DCS 2 3 or later CII 1 02 or later 816 Specifications PRI The PRI option is not applicable to Compact I 816 or 408 408i systems The card has the following configuration Contains one PRI access with RJ 45 interface having 1200 line termination Operates in LT T mode only You can only connectto a PSTN ISDN Network Termination Port NT BRI The different types of BRI card are shown in Table 1 BRI access to S port DCS BRIN YES BRI old NO Compact ll 4BRI YES o 02 Compact amp 4BRI URS 02 woo Table 1 BRI cards Note The only difference between these cards is the number of access and power feeding capabil ity 3 9 DCS SPECIAL APPLICATIONS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 Each BRI BRIN access has the following features Each port operates in either LT T or LT S mode Every setting is done by MMC there is no jumper or DIP switch to set You can connect an NT line or ISDN terminals See note below For LT S ports you can decide whether or not power is supplied to that port by MMC 419 32 numbers DCS range 7801 to 7832 or 24 numbers Compact 11 range 7801 to 7824 are reserved for terminals attached to the LT S
17. Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data None Related Items MMC 105 Station Speed Dial MMC 606 Assign Speed Block MMC 106 Page 2 of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER Used to view the programmable keys assigned to keyset stations In addition it allows the system administrator to assign key extenders to those programmed keys which can have ex tenders making general access feature keys more specific For example you may want to set an SPD Speed Dial key to dial personal speed dial code 01 when selected Extenders may also be entered in MMC 722 or 723 when programming key assignments The feature keys that can have extenders are listed below FEATURE FUNCTION EXTENDER zd a eno Direct Pick Up Extension or station group number DS Direct Station Select Station number GPIK Group Pick Up 01 20 01 20 01 08 01 04 IG In Out Group 500 529 500 519 500 509 50 53 MMPG Meet Me Page 0 4 5 0 2 5 Eos Station Message 01 20 SG Station Group 500 529 500 519 500 509 50 53 Speed Dial 00 49 00 49 00 49 00 49 500 999 500 999 500 799 699 SP UCD Supervisor UCD ACD Group Number IT VM Transfer VM AA Group Number PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data a
18. e g 9 followed by the 205 SPEED DIAL number to be dialled e g 08104264100 05 9 08104264100 If you make an error press the HOLD key to clear an entire entry or use the DOWN key to move the cursor back MMC 105 Page 1 of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 5 Press the F key to access MMC 106 Station Speed Dial Name to enter name OR Press the LEFT soft key to return to step 3 new dial no OR Press the RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 new stn OR Press TRSF to save and exit OR Press SPEAKER to save and advance to next MMC Default Data None Related Items MMC 106 Station Speed Dial Name MMC 606 Assign Speed Block MMC 105 Page 2 of 2 5 2001 DCS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL 106 STATION SPEED DIAL NAME Allows a name up to 11 characters to be entered br each personal speed dial location This name enables the speed dial number to be located when the directory dial feature is used The directory dial feature allows the display keyset user to select a speed dial location by viewing its name Names are written using the keypad Each key press selects a character and moves the cursor to the next position For example if the name is SAM SMITH press the number 7 four times to get the letter 5 Now press the number 2 once to get the letter A Continue selecting charac ters from the keypad to complet
19. or key 1 6B keyset toggles upper and lower case text Used to toggle to 705 Keys A to F are keys 19 to 24 on a 24B keyset or keys 7 to 12 on 12B keyset or keys 1 to 6 on a 6B keyset MMC 706 Page 1 of 2 DCS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL ACTION 1 Open programming and select 706 Display shows 2 Dialsystem speed entry number e g 505 OR Press UP or DOWN to select entry number and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Enter name using dial keypad and press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 OR Press the F key to return to MMC 705 OR Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data No names Related Items MMC 606 Assign Speed Block MMC 705 Assign System Speed Dial MMC 706 Page 2 of 2 MMC PROGRAMS NOVEMBER 2001 DISPLAY SYS SPEED NAME 500 SYS SPEED NAME 505 SYS SPEED NAME 505 TELECOMS SYS SPEED DIAL 505 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 707 AUTHORISATION CODE Allows you to set up authorisation codes on a per class of service basis Number of available en tries is DCS 250 001 250 Compact amp 11 100 001 100 816 30 01 30 408 408i 10 01 10 PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry
20. ues en T s mr ssewesewasua Y v ps crmasumwnae Y Y Y Y Y Y aanecorocaw Y Y Y lt m men Errem a anssen Y ms eswmms x v v xs ree 737 DECT SYSTEM CODE Y Y Y AUTH CODE FFFF r eseo Ems ranen Y Y reseonone 7 mImowwm spe 8 vu pw ew Dm Imemwsw fe woe asm eo none A www oe woe v ww ome ee 75 AUTO RECORD Y d ds RA Rd zs wsweosmemn x pw yw w w seems oe meam eps e senmo wmon ee en enee ecane roan y v osm an v Y Y oea soea assen remeros v Dx p fesses eT ve ype seme as fy fy mswommmu v v x v wp wpee Le umaeeme 1 1 pense EN EA Y lt SEE MMC 733 caca ER ERN HEN EHE EG lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt l
21. 0100 2500 MSEC 2000 MSEC 01 01 CO SUPV TM 0100 2500 MSEC 0400 MSEC 02 02 DTMF DURATION 0100 2500 MSEC 0100 MSEC 03 03 FIRST DGT DELAY 0100 2500 MSEC 0600 MSEC 04 04 FLASH TIME 0100 2500 MSEC 0070 MSEC 05 05 NO RING TM 001 255 SEC 004 SEC 06 06 PAUSE TIME 001 255 SEC 003 SEC 07 07 PRS DET TM 0000 2500 MSEC 0000 MSEC 08 08 RNG DET TM 0100 2500 MSEC 0300 MSEC 09 09 WINK TIME 0100 0300 MSEC 0200 MSEC n a 10 MF DP INT TM 0100 9900 MSEC 0800 MSEC 10 11 MFR DLY TM 00 25 SEC 00 SEC 11 12 PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 503 701 ANS BAK TM Display shows 0600 MS gt 2 Dial trunk number e g 704 704 ANS BAK TM OR 0600 MS Press UP or DOWN key to select trunk and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor OR OR Press ANS RLS to select all trunks and press RIGHT soft DAEELANSBAS TM 0600 MS key to move cursor 3 Dial timer number from above list 704 DTMF DUR OR 0600 MS _ Press UP or DOWN key to select timer and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 4 Enter new timer value must be four digits e g 0700 704 DTMF DUR System returns to step 2 0600 MS 50700 5 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data See table above Related Items None MMC 503 Page 1
22. 017 019 020 021 022 023 025 026 027 028 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 AA CALER ALM CLR AUTO RDL CALLBACK CLIP ABN CLIP INQ CLIP INV CONFER DALM CLR DAY NIG DIRECT DND DND OVRD DOOR DSS DTS EXT FWD FEATURE FLASH FOLLOW ME FORWARD HOLD HOT LINE INTERCOM MESSAGE MM PAGE NEW CALL OHVAED OHVAING ONEA2 OPERATOR OUT TRSF OVERRIDE PAGE 0 PAGE 1 PAGE2 PAGE 3 PAGE 4 PAGE 5 PAGE 6 PAGE 7 PAGE 8 PAGE 9 PICKUP SECURE SSPD TOL STN LOCK STNGRP 01 STNGRP 02 STNGRP 03 STNGRP 04 STNGRP 05 STNGRP 06 STNGRP 07 STNGRP 08 STNGRP 09 Auto answer control by caller Alarm sensor ring answer Retry on busy Callback CLIP abandoned CLIP inquiry for review CLIP investigate Conference DISA alarm ring clear Change day night mode Directory dial Do Not Disturb DND Override Door ring answer Direct station select Directtrunk select External call forward Feature key Trunk flash Follow Me call forward Call forward Group in out Hold Hotline Intercom call Message Meet me page New call Ohvaed Ohvaing 1A2 emulation Operator Outgoing transfer Executive Override Page zone 0 PAGING Page zone 1 PAGING Page zone 2 PAGING Page zone 3 PAGING Page zone 4 PAGING Page zone 5 PAGING Page zone 6 PAGING Page zone 7 PAGING Page zone 8 PAG
23. 04 B OR Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Enter station number e g 205 via dial keypad ENTRY STN 1234 OR 04 205 00001 Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 4 Move cursor under page zone desired e g 2 by press ENTRY STN 1234 ing UP or DOWN key and enter the digit 1 under the 04 205 01001 zone Press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 to continue with entries 5 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data No stations assigned All zone is set Related Items None MMC 604 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 605 ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE Determines which relays will close when one of the external page zones 5 to 8 is accessed 816 and 4081 408 systems have only one external page zone see below DCS The system must be equipped with a Trunk A card to allow external paging Each Trunk A card is equipped with two external page relays The page relays have default DNs of 360X e g 3601 Compact 11 external page zone is located on the base board Three are located on the op tional MISC card The page relays have default DNs of 36x e g 361 816 408i 408 One external page zone zone 5 is located on the base board The page relay has a default DN of 361 The optional port is 362 see MMC 219 PROGRAM KEYS UP
24. 09 CAMP ON On Off Allow camp on to busy extension 10 ANS DELAY 01 10 Answer Delay 11 RETRY CNT 0 5 No of times the AA will try to connect before routing to final destination 12 TRANS TABLE 01 12 Assigning associated TRANS TABLE 13 BUSY DEST Dest Alternative destination on busy 14 NO ANS DEST Dest Alternative destination on no answer 15 NO ACT DEST Dest Default destination on no action 16 INVALID DEST Dest Default destination on invalid action There is a total of 12 tables 01 12 in the system but not all tables have to be used DESTINATION STATION STATION GROUP AA PLAN NO REPEAT PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry MMC 733 Page 1 of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 733 AA PLAN PROG 01 Display shows DAYMSG 49 2 Dial AA PLAN TABLE number 01 12 e g 02 AA PLAN PROG 02 OR DAYMSG 49 Press UP or DOWN to select and press RIGHT soft key 3 Dial attribute number from above table e g 01 AA PLAN PROG 02 OR NIGHT MSG 49 Press UP or DOWN to select and press RIGHT soft key 4 Dial value e g 01 AA PLAN PROG 02 OR NIGHT MSG 01 Press UP or DOWN to select and press RIGHT soft key 5 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to
25. 1 and press 205 DIST RING RIGHT soft key to move cursor to C field 11 5 4 Press UP or DOWN to select value 205 DIST RING e g 2 T1 C2 5 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to save and advance to next MMC Default Data T F STN C F STN Related Items None MMC 318 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 319 BRANCH GROUP NotUsed in the UK MMC 319 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 400 CUSTOMER ON OFF PER TRUNK Assigns several options listed below on a pertrunk basis OPTIONS 0 1A2 EMULATE Trunk override call NO PRIVACY 1 TRUNK INC DND Allows trunk to override DND DIL 2 TRUNK FORWARD Allows trunk to be forwarded 3 LCR ALLOW Allows LCR to be switched ON OFF when trunk is directly accessed Note 1A2 Emulation means that a third party can be joined on an existing trunk conversation by pressing the DTS key for the line on their keyset PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 400 701 TRK ON OFF Display show 1A2 EMULATE OFF 2 Dial trunk number e g 704 704 TRK ON OFF OR 1A2 EMULATE OFF Press UP or DOWN key to select trunk P
26. 2 Dialthe incoming trunk number e g 705 705 USE 702 OR DIAL YES Press UP or DOWN key to select trunk and press RIGHT soft key OR Press ANS RLS to select all trunks 3 Dialthe trunk number e g 708 705 USE 708 OR DIAL YES Press UP or DOWN key to select trunk and press RIGHT soft key 4 Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO 705 USE 708 OR DIAL NO Press UP or DOWN key to select YES NO and press RIGHT soft key 5 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data DIAL YES Related Items None MMC 428 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 500 SYSTEM WIDE COUNTERS Used to set the values of the system counters The counters are listed below with a brief descrip tion of each DIAL COUNTER DESCRIPTION ALARM REMINDER The number of times that an alarm reminder will ring a station before cancelling RANGE 1 99 1 AUTO REDIAL The number of times the system will redial an outside number after the auto redial feature has been activated RANGE 1 15 2 DISA CALL Sets the maximum number of internal calls that can be made after accessing a DISA line RANGE 1 99 3 DISA LOCK Number of attempts the system will allow to incorrectly access a DISA line before locking out the DISA line RANGE 1 99 4 NEW CALL Number of times the system will allow a user to signal New Call line during one call RANGE 1 99 reache
27. 2 of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 607 UCD OPTIONS Des 1 cm v 816 4 408i x 408 Allows the UCD group assigned in MMC 601 to have more specific values for several attributes If UCD GROUP has not been programmed in the system you may be presented with a warning and not allowed to enter this MMC OPTION DIAL 0 FIRST MSG first message on AA card when no agents are available to an swer calls DIAL 1 SECOND MSG second message on AA card when no agents are available to answer calls DIAL 2 EXIT CODE routes the queued call to the Final Destination assigned in this MMC see below This must be dialled while 1st or 2nd MSG is active DIAL 3 RETRY COUNT second message will be cycled with MOH until this counter value is reached DIAL 4 FINAL DESTINATION if the call is not answered by the time RETRY COUNT time is reached it will be routed over this destination If you press the A key 19 on 24B keyset 7 on 12B keyset or 1 on 6B keyset you can en ter an AA Plan number DIAL 5 RING NEXT specifies how long ringing at an agent will last After this time ringing stops the agent is logged out from the group and ringing starts at the next idle agent DIAL 6 UCD RECALL determines length of MOH between MSGs DIAL 7 MOH SOURCE specifies MOH source to be presented to the caller DIAL 8 WRAP UP no calls are presented during this period DIAL 9 AUTO LOGOUT
28. 20 SEC 1 255 SEC PAGE TONE 500 MS 100 2500 MS 501 Page 2 of 6 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 PARK RECALL 45 SEC 0 255 SEC PC MMC LOCK not 408 5 MIN 1 60 MIN POWER DOWN 2000 MS 1000 9900 MS RECALL DISCONECT 2 MIN 1 255 MIN RECALL WAIT 15 SEC 1 255 SEC SMDR START DP 30 SEC 1 255 SEC SMDR START DTMF 15 SEC 1 255 SEC SYS HOLD RECALL 45 SEC 0 255 SEC TRANSFER RECALL 20 SEC 0 255 SEC UCDS AUDIO ALARM not 408 408 0 SEC 0 255 SEC UCDS VISUAL ALARM not 408 4081 0 SEC 0 255 SEC VMS UCD MSG 816 only 5 SEC 1 99 SEC VOICE DIAL DELAY not 816 or 408 408i 8 SEC 5 15 SEC RING ON not used 2 R D SIGNAL ON not used PERI UCD REPORT not 408 408 5 SEC 3 99 SEC Timer Descriptions AA INT DGT Controls the grace period between dialling valid digits before transferring call to INVLID DEST as set in MMC 733 on a per plan basis AA NO ACT Time AA will wait for first digit for processing after which call is transferred to the desti nation set in NO ACT DEST in MMC 733 AA TRANS After this time compare input digit with AA translation table MMC 732 and transfer to destination ALERT TONE Sets the duration of the attention tone preceding a call to a keyset in the Voice An nounce or Auto Answer mode This tone also precedes a forced Auto Answer call ALM REM INTERVAL Controls the time between ring attempts at a station when alarm reminder is set ALM REM RING OFF Controls the le
29. 408i STN DIAL NO Determines the station port dialling numbers 9 0 o DIAL NO Determines the trunk port dialling numbers 2 2 N A AA VD DIAL NO Determines the auto attendant voice dialler sew AA DIAL port dialling numbers MISC DIAL NO Determines the miscellaneous port dialling numbers e g MOH STNG DIAL NO Determines the station group dialling num 4 bers TRKG DIAL NO Determines the trunk group dialling num bers FEAT DIAL FEAT DIAL NO Determines Determines the feature codes feature codes 50 STN DIAL NO Determines the SO station dialling number DECT STN DIAL Determines the DECT station dialling num NO bers 408i systems only If changing feature codes using the FEAT DIAL NO option you can use the UP and DOWN keys to scroll through selectable features Features can also be entered via the dial keypad For ex ample for OHVA the number 6 would be pressed three times If Block Code is required press 2 twice for BARGE and then use the UP key to select BLOCK The example shown below de scribes the use of this option PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry MMC 724 Page 1 of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 72
30. A Y Yes in the appro priate column indicates that it can be used for that system e To quickly check allowed configuration settings for each type of system number of trunk group members card port numbers and so on see section 2 3 System Con figuration Quick Reference in Part 2 e begin programming refer to the appropriate MMC s in Part 4 Check the se lected MMC header bar to make sure the program is available on your system if you haven t already done so e Refer to Part 3 Special Applications for further information on voice mail auto at tendant integration individual station paging CLIP Calling Line Identification Pres entation toll restriction call barring and So programming 1 1 DCS INTRODUCTION COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 1 2 Programming Overview When the keyphone system arrives from the factory it contains default data This needs to be customised using the MMC programs to suit the customer s requirements MMC stands for Man Machine Code and each MMC is assigned a three digit code 100 101 and so on These MMCs are used to view create or change customer data on a display keyphone called KMMC programming For example MMC 601 is used to cre ate a station group system speed dial numbers are entered in MMC 705 key functions are assigned to individual keyphones or keysets using MMC 722 and system dial ling codes such as extension numbers and feature codes can be
31. ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 707 AUTHOR CODE 001 Display shows CODE COS 01 2 Dial code entry number see above including any AUTHOR CODE 005 leading zeros e g 05 or 005 CODE COS 01 OR Press UP or DOWN key to selected index number and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Enter authorisation code maximum four digits via dial AUTHOR CODE 005 keypad e g 1234 and press RIGHT soft key to CODE 1234 COS 01 cursor 4 Enter class of service number 01 30 e g 05 AUTHOR CODE 005 OR CODE 1234 05 05 Press UP or DOWN key to select COS and press RIGHT soft key to select and return to step 2 5 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data None Related Items MMC 305 Assign Forced Code MMC 707 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 708 ACCOUNT CODE Allows you to set up account codes The number of available entries for each system is DCS 500 001 500 Compact I 250 001 250 Compact 1 amp 816 200 001 200 408 408i 100 001 100 PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 708 ACCOUNT CODE Display shows 001 2 Dial code entry number see above e g 005 ACC
32. ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 711 LCR TIME SUN A Display shows HHMM 0000 LCRT 1 2 Dial day of week SUN SAT e g WED LCR TIME WED A OR HHMM 0000 LCRT 1 Press UP or DOWN to make day selection and press RIGHT soft key 3 Dial time band A D e g B LCR TIME WED B OR HHMM 0000 LCRT 1 Press UP or DOWN to make selection and press RIGHT soft key 4 Dialtime via keypad 24 hour clock format e g 0800 LCR TIME WED B Cursor moves to LCRT HHMM 0800 LCRT 1 5 Dialentry 1 4 LCR TIME WED B OR HHMM 0800 LCRT 2 Press UP or DOWN to select entry and press RIGHT soft key MMC 711 Page 1 of 2 DCS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL 6 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data Related Items MMC PROGRAMS NOVEMBER 2001 Systems can work 24 hours a day and 7 days a week with this default DAY SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT TIME BAND TIME A 0000 B 2359 A 0000 B 2359 A 0000 B 2359 A 0000 B 2359 A 0000 B 2359 A 0000 B 2359 A 0000 B 2359 MMC 210 Customer On Off MMC 400 Customer On Off Per Trunk MMC 710 LCR Digit Table MMC 712 LCR Route Table MMC 713 LCR Modify Digit Table MMC 711 Page 2 of 2 LCRT PRP PRP RPP PPP DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE The LCR ROUTE TABLE is responsible for selecting a specific trunk group in
33. ADVANCE Controls the period of time before selecting the next allowable route when a station is allowed to route advance LCR INTER DIGIT Controls the grace period between dialling valid digits before dropping the call and returning the user to error tone MCL DELAY Controls the time when the system should start transmitting Authorisation Code after sending MCL access code Cable amp Wireless 131 access OFF HOOK RING Controls the duration of time between ring bursts to a user who has a camped on call OFF HOOK SELECT Controls the grace period before placing a internal external call as pro grammed in MMC 306 OHVA ANSWER Controls the duration of an OHVA call before automatic rejection When a user re ceives OHVA with voice interrupt this situation will last until this timer expires If LCD phones receive OHVA REJ ECT will appear at righthand side of bottom line while this timer is activated OVERLAP INT DGT Controls the grace period between receiving address information in overlap receiving mode via BRI PRI line After expiration of this timer the system operator will be alerted PAGE TIME OUT Controls the duration of a page announcement PAGE TONE Controls the duration of tone burst heard over the page prior to the page announce ment PARK RECALL Controls the period of time a call is parked before recalling to the call park origina tor PC MMC LOCK Monitors PCMMC activity drops the link if no action is created by
34. DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 721 201 SAVE KEY Display shows RESTORE 2 Enter desired station number e g 205 205 SAVE KEY OR RESTORE Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key 3 Press UP or DOWN key to select function e g SAVE 205 SAVE KEY SAVE 4 Press RIGHT soft key to enter and return to step 2 OR Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data RESTORE Related Items MMC 107 Key Extender MMC 722 Station Key Programming MMC 723 System Key Programming MMC 721 Page 1 of 1 DCS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL MMC PROGRAMS NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING Used to customise programmable keys on individual keysets and add on modules AOMs All systems are provided with default functions for some keys to provide basic operation For exam ple keys 1 and 2 are set as CALL keys by default because it is recommended that these keys should always function as CALL keys but see Note below Other keys can be programmed as described here You can use the UP and DOWN keys to scroll through the selectable functions when programming keys see table at the end of this MMC Functions can also be entered via the dial keypad For example to assign the OHVA function key number 6 can be pressed three times If the BOSS function is required press 2 twice for the first letter B and then use the UP or DOWN key to change the selection
35. DOWN key to select mailbox Press RIGHT soft key 4 Dial Voice Mail port number e g 519 AUTO RECORD OR PORT 519 CALL Press UP or DOWN key to select port Press RIGHT soft key 5 Press UP or DOWN key to select call type AUTO RECORD 1 or B e g and press RIGHT soft key PORT 519 CALL B 6 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data PORT NONE CALL I Related Items Cadence programming SVMi 4 programming MMC 752 DCS Compact II Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 753 WARNING DESTINATION Cadence amp SVMi 4 pps x cm 7 s16 X 408 x 408 Provides an emergency destination for calls to Cadence or SVMi 4 if the card is removed or off line The destination can be a station number or a group number Any station call that is for warded to Voice Mail will remain ringing at the forwarding station until answered Note The destination is the same as the VM ALARM mailbox in MMC 755 PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 753 WARNING DEST Display shows default destination DEST 500 2 Dial destination number e g 213 WARNING DEST OR DEST 213 Press UP or DOWN to
36. DOWN to scroll through trunk numbers and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor OR OR Press ANS RLS to select ALL PBX MINE 3 Dial 1 for PBX or 0 for 704 PBX LINE OR PBX LINE Use UP or DOWN to scroll through options Press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data All trunks Line Related Items None MMC 401 Page of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 402 TRUNK DIAL TYPE pcs 7 7 816 V 408i X 408 Used to determine the dialling type of each C O line There are two options 0 Dual tone multi frequency DTMF 1 Pulse rotary dial PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 402 701 DIAL TYPE Display shows DTMF TYPE 2 Dial trunk number e g 704 704 DIAL TYPE OR DTMF TYPE Use UP or DOWN to scroll through trunk numbers and press RIGHT soft key to move the cursor OR OR Press ANS RLS to select ALL ALL DIAL TYPE 3 Dial 1 for PULSE or 0 for DTMF e g 1 704 DIAL TYPE OR DIAL PULSE TYPE Use UP or DOWN to scroll through options Press RIGHT soft keys to return to step 2 4 Press TRS
37. Direct station select Directtrunk select External call forward Feature key Trunk flash Follow Me call forward Call forward Group in out Hold Hotline Intercom call Message Meet me page New call OHVAed MMC 701 Page 6 of 7 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 408i 408 31 28 OHVAING OHVAing 32 29 ONEA2 1A2 emulation 33 30 OPERATOR Operator 34 31 OUT TRSF Outgoing transfer 35 32 OVERRIDE Executive Override 36 33 PAGE 0 Page zone 0 PAGING 37 34 PAGE 1 Page zone 1 PAGING 38 35 PAGE 2 Page zone 2 PAGING 41 PAGE 5 Page zone 5 PAGING 42 45 42 Not used 46 43 Page zone PAGING 47 44 PICKUP Call pickup 48 45 SECURE Override secure 49 46 SSPD TOL System speed dial toll check 50 47 STN LOCK Station locking 51 48 STNGRP 01 Station group 01 calling 52 49 STNGRP 02 Station group 02 calling 53 50 STNGRP 03 Station group 03 calling 54 51 STNGRP 04 Station group 04 calling 55 81 52 78 Not used 82 79 SYS SPD System speed dial 83 80 TRKGRPO1 Trunk group 01 calling 84 81 TRKGRP02 Trunk group 02 calling 85 93 82 90 Not used 94 91 UNCO CNF CO to CO conference 95 92 ABSENCE Absence Default Data Toll Level all 5 Related Items Features OVERRIDE NO all others YES MMC 700 Copy COS Contents MMC 702 Toll Deny Table MMC 703 Toll Allowance Table Toll Restriction MMC 701 Page 7 of 7 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 7
38. Hold Source MMC 410 Assign DISA Trunk MMC 409 Page 2 of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 410 ASSIGN DISA TRUNK Allows the system to have Direct Inward System Access DISA Because there is a possibility that unauthorised calls will be made via this feature several safeguards have been added The user must be informed of these to prevent unnecessary service calls DISA can lock out when a predetermined number of invalid consecutive calls are attempted Callers will then receive ring back tone until a programmable timer has expired The key may be used to initiate new dial tone while in a station to station call The key may be used to terminate the DISA call and dis connect the central office line Multiple central office calls and internal calls are possible Note In order to use DISA the caller must first dial a valid station number followed by a fourdigit pass code This passcode is defined in MMC 101 Change User Passcode DISA users MUST change this pass code as the default number cannot be used PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL trunks FEATURE KEYS 0 NORMAL No DISA service 1 DAY DISA is available in day mode 2 NIGHT DISA is available in night mode 3 BOTH DISA is ava
39. KEYS Key No Wild Card Depends on keyset type 19 24B or 7 12B or 1 6B 20 24B or 8 12B or 2 6B 21 24B or 9 12B or 3 6B lt ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 703 ALOW 001 BCDEFG Display shows 000000 2 Dial entry number e g 005 ALOW 005 BCDEFG OR 000000 Press UP or DOWN key to select index and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor and enter toll pattern via dial pad e g 212 BEOW CBE OR 212 000000 Enter wild card e g 21X from above list and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor to COS options ALOW 005 BCDEFG 21X 000000 3 Press UP or DOWN key to move cursor along line until ALOW 001 BCDEFG under toll class mark e g E 212 000100 Enter a 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press RIGHT soft key to return to step 1 OR Press LEFT soft key to return to step 2 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data All entries are set to 0 Related Items MMC 301 Assign Station COS MMC 701 Assign COS Contents MMC 702 Toll Deny Table MMC 704 Assign Wild Character MMC 703 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 704 ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER Provides flexibility to toll restriction call barring when a specific numbering plan is desired There are only three entry tables but more than one digit can be assigned per table if needed PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll throu
40. KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 756 SET VMMOH Display shows 717 NOTUSE 2 Press UP or DOWN key to select port and SET VMMOH press RIGHT soft key 717 NOTUSE 3 Press UP or DOWN key to select MOH file SET VMMOH number 00 99 and press RIGHT soft key 717 01 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Note nos 00 99 are equivalent to Cadence or SVMi 4 file nos 5000 5099 see Cadence or SVMi 4 documentation Default Data NOT USE Related Items Cadence programming SVMi 4 programming MMC 756 DCS Compact II Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 757 VM IN OUT Cadence amp SVMi 4 pcs V a x 7 1 s16 x 4081 X 408 X Defines which VM port is used for incoming calls outgoing calls or both Options are IN OUT IN OUT Can also be used to reset the current MOH port set in MMC 756 to one of the above PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 757 VM IN OUT Display shows 717 IN
41. MESSAGE 116 ALARM AND MESSAGE AJ w OOO OU e N 110 111 113 1 Hr nr m DH swin S oo 119 SET CLIP DISPLAY 121 KEYSET LANGUAGE OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING CHANGE CUSTOMER PASS CODE CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODES ASSIGN UA DEVICE COMMON BELL CONTROL 05 ASSIGN LOUD BELL BARGE IN TYPE ASSIGN VM AA PORT ASSIGN RING TYPE ASSIGN ADD ON MODULE CUSTOMER ON OFF DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT 2 ALARM RINGING STATION ALARM MESSAGE DISA ALARM RINGING STATION VOICE DIALLER OPTIONS VOICE DIALLER ASSIGNMENTS CCC OPTION COMMON RELAY SERVICE TYPE 220 ISDN SERVICE TYPE CUSTOMER ON OFF PER STATION 01 ASSIGN STATION COS 302 PICKUP GROUPS ASSIGN BOSS SECRETARY ASSIGN STATION TRUNK USE 600 ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP 305 ASSIGN FORCED CODE HOT LINE ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE 309 ASSIGN STATION MUSIC ON HOLD 604 ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE LCR CLASS OF SERVICE ASSIGN SIM PARAMETER 606 ASSIGNSPEEDBLOCK ALLOW CLIP ASSIGN PIN CODE NIN ojo N e N NIN AJ w N CALLFORWARD _ o i O SET ANSWER MODE STATION NAME 0 0 STATION SPEED DIAL 0 0 STATION SPEEDDIALNAME KEYEXTENDER STATION STATUS O DATE DISPLAY STATION ON OFF i O KEYSETRINGTONE ALARM REMINDER VIEW MEMO NUMBER
42. MMC Default Data ON 1000 msec OFF 1000 msec Related Items None MMC 511 DCS Compact II CADENCE Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 512 ASSIGN HOLIDAY bes x cm v 816 7 408i v 408 V Assigns holiday dates to a station for the current year Station will remain in Night Service for those periods assigned Up to 60 dates may be entered Date format MMDD Month Day e g 25 December would be 1225 PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 512 ASSIGN HOLIDAY Display shows 01 2 Press UP or DOWN key to select option 01 60 ASSIGN HOLIDAY and press RIGHT soft key 01 _ 3 Enter date format MMDD ASSIGN HOLIDAY 01 1225 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data None Related Items None MMC 512 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 600 ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP Used to assign the operator group for day and night PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Ope
43. PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 Part 3 Special Applications Part 3 provides additional information covering the following topics e Voice Mail Auto Attendant Integration e Individual Station Page e CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation Toll Restriction Call Barring Overview e Overview 3 1 DCS SPECIAL APPLICATIONS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 Voice Mail Auto Attendant Integration In Band SMDI This section focuses mainly on in band integration Systems may alternatively accommo date Bellcore standard SMDI available by setting in MMC 210 SMDI VMS SET option Because of the increased popularity of voice mail and auto attendant use all DCS systems include many programmable options to address this demand The degree of integration that can be achieved depends on the abilities of the voice mail auto attendant VM AA sys tem as well as the telephone system The following describes the capabilities provided by systems for voice mail via in band inte gration Hardware Provisions e The VM AA system must be connected to single line circuits on any SLI card Each portis equipped with a dedicated DTMF receiver for detecting DTMF signalling from the VM AA e These ports also provide an instant break in loop current when the calling party hangs up This is called a disconnect signal Software Provisions e Screened Or Unscreened Transfer There are no special codes needed to
44. Provides a means of adding or deleting CLIP review blocks bins to an individual keyset With the ability to delete a block or blocks it will not be necessary to waste these on such items as voice mail and DPIMs or on keysets that do not have displays The FREE value displayed shows how many blocks are left to be assigned The system automatically assigns 1 block of 10 numbers to each keyset Each keyset may be assigned a maximum of 5 blocks 50 numbers PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 608 201 REVIEW BLK Display shows 10 0180 FREE 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 REVIEW BLK OR 10 0180 FREE Use UP and DOWN to select station and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Enter number of entries e g 50 205 REVIEW BLK OR 50 0140 FREE Press UP or DOWN to select OR Press HOLD key to delete bin s 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data One block of 10 entries Related Items None MMC 608 Page 1of1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 700 COPY COS CONTENTS Allows you to copy a selected class of service COS to another COS This is useful for example if you want to create
45. SECRETARY Assigns BOSS stations to SECRETARY stations One BOSS station can have up to four SECRE TARY stations and one SECRETARY station can have up to four BOSS stations A dedicated BOSS key must be programmed on the SECRETARY keyset s A dedicated BOSS key must also be programmed on the BOSS keyset s Note For 408 408i systems a BOSS station can have up to two SECRETARY stations and vice versa PROGRAM KEYS Key 24 24B keyset or key 12 12B keyset or key 6 6B keyset is used DISPLAY UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL to toggle BOSS SECRETARY field ACTION 1 Open programming and select 303 Display shows 2 Dial BOSS station number e g 205 OR Press UP or DOWN to select station and press RIGHT soft key 3 Dial SECRETARY station number e g 201 OR Press UP or DOWN to select station Press RIGHT soft key to return to step 3 to enter more SECR numbers 4 Press LEFT soft key to return to step 2 and continue entries OR Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data NONE Related Items MMC 722 Station Key Programming MMC 303 Page 1 of 1 BOSS STN NONE SECR 1 NONE BOSS STN 205 SECR 1 NONE BOSS STN 205 SECR 1 201 BOSS STN 205 SECR 2 202 DCS MMC P
46. SMDR Allows the system administrator to enter a 16 character name which will appear on the SMDR header Can be selected to print CLIP data received from the C O on incoming ISDN calls This option requires the use of a 132 column printer or an 80 column printer set for condensed print Not available on 408 systems If this option is set to YES unanswered calls will printon SMDR Not available on 408 systems Number of dialled digits not to be printed 00 18 Determines whether DDI number and name printon SMDR Not available on 408 systems The DIRECTORY NAME that appears on the SMDR header is written using the keypad Pressing a key selects a character and moves the cursor to the next position For example if the directory name is SAM SMITH press the number 7 four times to get the letter S Now press the number 2 once to get the letter A Continue selecting characters from the keypad to complete the name Press the programmable A key to toggle between upper and lower case text Tip When the character you want is on the same key as the previous character you typed in press the UP key to move the cursor to the right and enter the new character MMC 725 Page 1 of 3 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 The key can be used for the following special characters in sequence of key presses PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Use
47. SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 803 TENANT GROUP Display shows 1 5 1 01 1 2 Enter cabinet C number if no change press RIGHT TENANT GROUP Soft key to move cursor 1 5 1 P 01 T 1 3 Enter slot S number if no change press RIGHT TENANT GROUP soft key to move cursor 1 5 1 01 T 1 4 Enter port P number if no change press RIGHT TENANT GROUP Soft key to move cursor 1 5 1 01 1 5 Entertenant T number if change press RIGHT TENANT GROUP soft key to return to step 2 C 1 5 1 P 01 1 6 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data assignments tenant 1 Related Items Tenant group MMC 803 DCS Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 804 SYSTEM PARAMETER Provides a means of setting parameters for the system ports to work with one of the follow a personal computer PC Station Message Detail Recording SMDR UCD statistics report periodic UCD information except 408 4081 CTI TSAPI interface DCS and Compact Il only All systems have two 1 0 ports Ports 1 and 2 except 408 408i which have one 1 0 port Port 1 Programming be accomplished easily using the tables below to customise any I O port PARAMETER OPTIONS Dial 0 Service Type of Service Dial 1 Baud Rate Sp
48. TRANS not 408 4081 00 SEC 0 25 SEC ALERT TONE 1000 MS 100 2500 MS ALM REM INTERVAL 23 SEC 1 255 SEC ALM REM RING OFF 10 SEC 1 25 SEC ATT RECALL 30 SEC 1 255 SEC AUTO REDIAL INT 30 SEC 1 255 SEC AUTO REDIAL RLS 45 SEC 1 255 SEC BARGE IN TONE INT 1300 MS 100 9900 MS CALLBACK NO ANS 30 SEC 1 255 SEC CAMP ON RECALL 30 SEC 1 255 SEC CLIP DISPLAY not408 5 SEC 1 25 SEC CLIP MSG RECEIVE not 408 6 SEC 1 25 SEC CO CLEAR 408 only 30 SEC 0 255 SEC CO CONFIRM 3 MIN 0 255 MIN CO CO DISCONNECT 20 MIN 0 255 MIN CONFER TONE INT 9900 MS 100 9900 MS CONFIRM TONE 1000 5 100 2500 5 CRD TONE INT not 816 or 408 4081 30 SEC 1 255 SEC DIAL PASS 5 SEC 1 25 SEC DISA DISCONNECT 30 MIN 1 255 MIN DISA LOCK OUT 30 MIN 1 255 MIN DISA NOANS DISC 30 SEC 0 255 SEC DISA PASS CHECK 30 MIN 1 255 MIN DISPLAY DELAY 3 SEC 1 255 SEC DOOR LOCK RELEASE 500 MS 100 2500 MS DOOR RING DETECT 50 MS 10 250 MS DOOR RING OFF 30 SEC 1 255 SEC E HOLD RECALL 45 SEC 0 255 SEC EXT FWD DELAY 10 SEC 1 255 SEC FIRST DIGIT 10 SEC 1 255 SEC HOK FLASH MAX 120 MS 20 2500 MS HOK FLASH MIN 80 MS 20 2500 MS HOOK OFF 200 MS 100 2500 MS HOOK ON 200 MS 20 2500 MS INQUIRY RELEASE 30 SEC 1 255 SEC INTER DIGIT 10 SEC 1 255 SEC KMMC LOCK OUT 30 SEC 10 255 SEC LCR ADVANCE 5 SEC 1 255 SEC LCR INTER DIGIT 5 SEC 1 255 SEC MCL DELAY 4 SEC 1 8 SEC OFF HOK RING INT 15 SEC 1 255 SEC OFF HOOK SELECT 5 SEC 1 255 SEC OHVA ANSWER 10 SEC 1 255 SEC OVERLAP INT DGT not 408 7 SEC 1 15 SEC PAGE TIME OUT
49. Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL MMC 110 Page 1 of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 110 201 STN ON OFF Display shows AUTO HOLD OFF 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 STN ON OFF OR AUTO HOLD OFF Press UP or DOWN to select keyset and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor OR Press ANS RLS for ALL ALL STN ON OFF AUTO HOLD 3 Press UP or DOWN to select option and 205 STN ON OFF press RIGHT soft key to move cursor HOT KEYPAD ON 4 Dial1 for ON 0 for OFF 205 STN ON OFF OR HOT KEYPAD OFF Press UP or DOWN to select ON or OFF and press LEFT or RIGHT soft key to return to step 3 5 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data Auto Hold Off Auto Timer On Headset Use Off Hot Keypad On Key Tone On Page Rejoin On Ring Pref On Call Cost Off Not Cont CID Off AME BGM Off AME PSWD Off Related Items MMC 301 Assign Station COS MMC 701 Assign COS Contents MMC 110 Page 2 of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 111 KEYSET RING TONE Allows the system administrator to select the ring tone heard at each keyset There are eight 1 8 ring tones available A short t
50. YES Press UP or DOWN key to select station Press RIGHT soft key Dial 0 for NO or 1 for YES ASSIGN MAIL BOX OR 302 YES Press UP or DOWN key to select Press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data All stations YES All NO Related Items Cadence programming SVMi 4 programming MMC 751 DCS Compact II Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 752 AUTO RECORD Cadence amp SVMi 4 pcs V a x 7 s16 x 4081 X 408 X Specific stations can be assigned to automatically record conversations Options for recording are Station number STN Mailbox MB Voice Mail port Call type all incoming calls I all outgoing calls or both incoming and outgoing calls B A maximum of eight stations can be assigned at any one time PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 752 AUTO RECORD Display shows 5 301 2 Dial station number e g 302 AUTO RECORD OR STN 302 Press UP or DOWN key to select station Press RIGHT soft key 3 Dial mailbox number e g 341 AUTO RECORD OR STN 302 MB 341 Press UP or
51. abandoned call list These records will also be stored in the station review list Note In order for these abandoned call records to print on SMDR use MMC 725 SMDR Options and set Option 11 Abandon Call to YES ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 415 701 TRK ABNDN Display shows REPORT YES 2 Dial trunk number e g 705 705 TRK ABNDN OR REPORT YES Press UP or DOWN to select trunk and use LEFT or RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Dial 1for YES or 0 for NO e g 0 705 TRK ABNDN OR REPORT NO Press UP or DOWN to scroll through options and use LEFT or RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data REPORT YES Related Items MMC 119 Set CLIP Display MMC 312 Allow CLIP MMC 608 Assign CLIP Review Block MMC 722 Station Key Programming MMC 723 System Key Programming MMC 725 SMDR Options MMC 728 CLIP Translation Table MMC 415 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 416 ASSIGN AC15 TRANSLATION pcs a V cu v 816 x 408i X 408 X Provides an AC15 tieline with the ability to use DDI translation tables MMC 714 Options are 0 UNUSE DID TRANS 1 USE DID TRANS PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC ANS RLS Used
52. advance to next MMC Default Data MODE SEQUENTIAL All trunks are in group 9 and or 80 group 9 only for 408 408i Related Items LCR programming Tenant programming DCS only MMC 603 Page 2 of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 604 ASSIGN STATION PAGE ZONE Allows the assignment of a keyset to any of the internal paging zones 1 to 4 and All page page plus The total number of keysets that can receive a page is limited to 80 DCS or 40 Com pact Il or 12 816 or 4 408 408 keyset may be assigned to more than one zone The assignment is controlled by the use of class marks If a keyset is flagged as 1 in a zone column it will receive pages for that zone If the keyset is flagged as 0 it will not receive pages for that zone Keysets can receive pages for more than one zone Note 408 408i systems are assigned internal page zones 1 2 only Therefore only these zones can be flagged as 1 Zones 3 and 4 are flagged as 0 PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 604 ENTRY STN 1234 Display shows 01 NONE 00001 2 Enter index number 01 80 or 01 40 or 01 12 or 1 4 ENTRY STN 1234 depending on your system see above via keypad 04 NONE 00001 e g
53. advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL trunks only ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 406 701 TRK RING Display shows D 500 N 500 2 Dial trunk number e g 704 704 TRK RING OR D 500 500 Use UP or DOWN to scroll through trunk numbers and press the RIGHT soft key to move the cursor 3 Dial station number or station group number for day 704 TRK RING e g 205 D 205 N 500 OR Press UP or DOWN key to select station number or sta tion group number and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 4 Dial station number or station group number for night 704 TRK RING e g 501 0 205 N 501 OR Press UP or DOWN key to select station number or sta tion group number and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 5 Press TRSF to store and exit Bee SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data All trunks day 500 night 500 day and night 50 for 408 408i systems Related Items MMC 202 Change Feature Passcodes MMC 507 Assign Auto Night Time MMC 601 Assign Station Group MMC 406 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 407 FORCED TRUNK RELEASE Provides a positive forced trunk release to a specific trunk or all trunks in the event of a trunk lock up PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to nex
54. amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 605 EXT PAGE ZONE 5 Display shows first page zone Note Member number MEMBER 1 NONE shows as 1 or 01 etc depending on system 2 Dial page zone number e g 6 EXT PAGE ZONE 6 OR MEMBER 1 NONE Use UP or DOWN to select desired page zone numbers and press RIGHT soft key to move the cursor 3 Dial member number e g 3 or 03 EXT PAGE ZONE 6 OR MEMBER 3 NONE Use UP or DOWN to select member numbers and press RIGHT soft key to move the cursor OR Press LEFT soft key to return to step 2 4 Dial relay number via dial keypad e g 362 or 3602 EXT PAGE ZONE 6 and press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 MEMBER 3 362 OR Press LEFT soft key to return to step 3 5 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data None Related Items MMC 219 Common Relay Service Type MMC 605 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 606 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK Provides a means of adding deleting speed dial blocks to from the system or individual keysets With the ability to delete a block or blocks of speed dial these need not be wasted on such items as voice mail SIMs and DPIMs or on stations that do not r
55. before recalling See ATT Recall Time EXT FWD DELAY Controls the External Call Forward feature which allows a station to ring before the call is placed on external call forwarding FIRST DIGIT Controls how long the system will wait for dialling to begin before dropping the dial tone and returning the user to error tone HOK FLASH MAX Monitors the duration of a hookswitch flash to ensure that the flash is valid and not a line noise or an accidental hookswitch bounce LONGEST DURATION MMC 501 Page 4 of 6 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 HOK FLASH MIN Monitors the duration of a hookswitch flash to ensure that the flash is valid and not a line noise or an accidental hookswitch bounce SHORTEST DURATION HOOK OFF Controls the time before dial tone is sent single line station HOOK ON Sets the minimum amount of time that the system will recognise as an SLT hang up Must be greater than HOK FLASH MAX INQUIRY RELEASE Monitors the duration of the action of the soft key to determine when to return the LCD back to a normal status This timer affects only display phones INTER DIGIT Controls the grace period between dialling valid digits before dropping the call and returning the user to error tone KMMC LOCK OUT Controls the grace period between programming actions while in a program ming session KMMC not PCMMC The timer automatically returns the system to secure program ming status LCR
56. duration of an unsupervised conference when it expires both trunks are disconnected CONFER TONE INT Controls the intervals between the tones heard by the parties in a conference CONFIRM TONE The tone heard when a feature is activated or deactivated CRD TONE INT Controls the interval of the intermittent tone presented to station users whose calls are being recorded using the Auto Record feature see CADENCE documentation DIAL PASS The wait time for preventing the misdialling of an outgoing call After the last digit has been dialled the voice path is connected DISA DISCONNECT Controls the maximum duration of a DISA call DISA LOCK OUT Controls the time period for which a DISA call is not allowed to be made after the DISA error counter has expired MMC 500 DISA NOANS DISC Controls the time period after which a DISA call is disconnected if the call is not answered DISA PASS CHECK Defines the time period before the system clears the incorrect passcode counter DISPLAY DELAY Controls how long information is shown in the LCD This timer also controls how long error tone is heard DOOR LOCK RELEASE Controls how long the door lock relay is activated DOOR RING DETECT Controls the period of time before a call is answered by the door phone DOOR RING OFF Controls the duration of ringing at the door ring destination before automatically cancelling E HOLD RECALL Controls how long a call is held exclusively at a station
57. entry Used to select ALL MMC 300 Page of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 300 201 CUS ON OFF Display shows ACCESS DIAL ON 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 CUS ON OFF OR ACCESS DIAL ON Press UP or DOWN to select station OR Press ANS RLS for all and press RIGHT soft key to ALL CUS ON OFF Tapes Eh ACCESS DIAL ON 3 Press UP or DOWN to select feature and ALL CUS ON OFF press RIGHT soft key to move cursor ACCESS DIAL ON 4 Dial 1 for or 0 for OFF ALL CUS ON OFF OR ACCESS DIAL OFF Press UP or DOWN to select ON OFF and press RIGHT soft key 5 Press LEFT soft key to return to step 2 Press RIGHT soft key to return to step 1 OR Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data STN CALL PRT OFF FWD DLY USE OFF other features set to ON Related Items LCR programming MMC 300 Page 2 of 2 DCS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL MMC 301 MMC PROGRAMS NOVEMBER 2001 ASSIGN STATION COS Used to assign a day and night class of service to each station A number of different classes of service be defined in MMC 701 Assign COS Contents i e 30 for DCS Compact Il systems 01 30 10 for 816 systems 01 10 and four for 408 408i systems 1 4 PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and
58. from BARGE to BOSS Note 408 408i systems do not support AOMs and default key functions are different from other systems For example keys 1 and 2 are not set as CALL keys by default as these are not required PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 722 201 KEY MAST Display shows 1 1 gt OR OR For 408 408i systems display shows but the programming procedure is the same as follows Enter station number e g 205 OR Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key If you have a 408 408i system or if selected station has no AOM pair go to step 4 Enter 0 for MAST 1 for 1 or 2 for AOM2 OR Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key Enter key number e g 18 OR Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key OR Press programmable key MMC 722 Page 1 of 3 21 KEY PROG 01 DT71 gt 205 KEY MAST 01 CALL1 gt 205 KEY MAST 01 CALL1 gt 205 KEY MAST 18 NONE 3_ DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 5 Press dial key pad number to make selection 205 KEY MAST OR 18 NONE GPIK Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to advance cursor to step 6
59. group cannot be assigned PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Clears previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 205 361 LOUD BELL Display shows current setting RING PAIR NONE 2 Dialloud bell number e g 362 362 LOUD BELL OR RING PAIR NONE Use UP or DOWN to scroll through loud bell numbers and press RIGHT soft key to move the cursor 3 Enter station number e g 201 362 LOUD BELL OR RING PAIR 201 Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data NONE Unassigned Related Items MMC 219 Common Relay Service Type MMC 205 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 206 BARGE IN TYPE The Barge In feature allows selected keysets to intrude on other keysets which are not set as se cure from barge in This MMC sets the type of barge in that is permitted DIAL TYPE OF BARGE IN DESCRIPTION 0 NO BARGE IN Barge in feature is unavailable regardless of a sta tion s barge in status 1 WITH TONE Barge in will have an intrusion tone and display at the barged in on station 2 WITHOUT TONE There is no barge in tone or display at the barged in on station and the barging in statio
60. is called or a caller is transferred to a group ringback is sent to the caller A busy sig nal will not be returned even if all group members are busy Calls to a group do not follow the call forward ing instructions of any stations in the group PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 601 501 STN GROUP Display shows TYPE NORMAL GRP 2 Dial group number e g 505 505 STN GROUP OR TYPE NORMAL GRP Press UP or DOWN key to select group and press LEFT soft key to move cursor to type of group 3 Dial group type 0 4 0 1 505 STN GROUP OR TYPE VMAA Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press LEFT soft key to move cursor to TYPE 3 Dial feature option number 0 5 e g 1 505 STN GROUP OR RING SEQUENTIAL Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 4 Dial ring option 0 2 e g 1 505 STN GROUP OR RING DISTRIBUTE Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press LEFT soft key to move cursor back to RING or press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 5 Dial next feature option and continue 505 STN GROUP OR RING DISTRIBUTE Press UP or DOWN key to select option OR Press LEFT soft key to return to step 2 6 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to
61. music is always the odd numbered address e g 3701 3703 Compact 11 There is a total of two possible music sources but this depends on whether a MISC card is installed in the system One music source is provided on the base board switch select in ternal external the other external source is provided on the MISC card The default directory number of a background music source is 371 372 Internal music is always address 371 816 408 408i There is a music source on the base board switch select internal external The default directory number of a background music source is 371 PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 309 201 STN MOH Display shows current setting MOH SOURCE TONE 2 Dial keyset number e g 205 205 STN MOH OR SOURCE TONE Use UP or DOWN to scroll through keyset numbers and press RIGHT soft key to move the cursor OR OR Press ANS RLS to select all stations ies SOURCES 3 Enter source number e g 371 205 STN MOH OR MOH SOURCE 371 Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data None Related Items MMC 308 Assig
62. press the RIGHT soft MODE NORMAL key to move the cursor 4 Enter 1 for Yes or 0 for No for DECT CLEAR 7901 DECT CLEAR OR DECT CLEAR YES Press UP or DOWN key to select 5 Press TRSF button to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER button to store and advance to next MMC Default Data Forced mode Related Items MMC 737 DECT System Code MMC 739 BSI Download MMC 741 BSI Card Restart MMC 742 BSI Status MMC 743 DBS Status MMC 744 BSI Registration On Off MMC 745 BSI Carrier MMC 738 DCS Compact Page 1 of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 739 BSI DOWNLOAD bes v cm V 816 X 408 X 408 Used to download a new version of the DBS software when you upgrade to a new version of BSI ROM PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 739 BSI SLOT 2 DBS 1 Display shows DOWNLOAD NO 2 Selectthe slot number see above via UP or DOWN BSI SLOT 3 DBS 1 key e g 3 DOWNLOAD NO 3 Select the DBS number see above via UP or DOWN BSI SLOT 3 DBS 1 key e g 1 DOWNLOAD NO 4 Press UP or DOWN key to select download and BSI SLOT 3 DBS 1 confirm download DOWNLOAD YES BSI SLOT 3 DBS 1 ARE YOU SURE YES When downloading is in progress the d
63. previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 723 TYPE 24 BTN SETS Display shows 01 CALL1 gt OR OR For 408 408i systems display shows TYPE 24 BTN SETS but programming procedure is the same as follows 01 DT71 gt MMC 723 Page 1 of 3 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 2 Enter keyset type via dial keypad using table above e g 1 TYPE 12 BTN SETS OR 01 CALL1 gt Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key 3 Enter key number e g 12 TYPE 12 BTN SETS OR 12 DS gt Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key 4 Press dial keypad to select function TYPE 12 BTN SETS OR 1 06 Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to advance cursor to step 5 to enter extender if re quired OR Press LEFT soft key to return to step 3 5 If required enter extender e g 03 TYPE 12 BTN SETS OR 12 35 gt GPIK03 Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 6 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data See MMC 722 Programmable Key Function Assignments X means a function is not available DCS CH 816 408 AAPLAY AUTO ATTND MESSAGE PLAY lt lt x AUTO ATTND MESSAGE RECORD Y x fx CALL RECORD DIRECTORY y O DND DONOTDISTURE O DP DI
64. store and advance to next MMC Default Data Group Type Normal Grp Trsf 000 Sec Ring Mode Uncondition Next Port None Overflow 000 Sec Grp Member 01 first station MMC 601 Page 2 of 3 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 Related Items MMC 203 Assign UA Device MMC 204 Common Bell Control MMC 211 Door Ring Assignment MMC 212 Alarm Ringing Station MMC 406 Trunk Ring Assignment MMC 602 Station Group Name MMC 601 Page 3 of 3 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 602 STATION GROUP Allows the system installer or administrator to enter a name up to 11 characters to identify an individual station group Names are written using the keypad Pressing a key selects a character and moves the cursor to the next position For example if the name is SAMSUNG press the number 7 four times to get the letter S Now press the number 2 once to get the letter A Continue selecting characters from the keypad to complete the name Press the programmable A key to toggle between upper and lower case text Tip When the character you want is on the same key as the previous character you typed in press the UP key to move the cursorto the right then selectthe character The key can be used for the following special characters in sequence of key presses PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to ente
65. text Tip When the character you want is on the same key as the previous character you typed in press the UP key to move the cursorto the right then selectthe character The key can be used for the following special characters in sequence of key presses PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry A Key 19 24B keysets or key 7 12B keysets or key 1 6B key sets toggles upper case and lower case text MMC 116 Page 1 of 2 DCS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL ACTION 1 Open programming and select 116 Display shows 2 Dial station number e g 205 OR Press UP or DOWN to select station and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor OR Press ANS RLS to select all stations 3 Dial alarm number e g 2 OR Press UP or DOWN to select alarm and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 4 Enter alarm time in 24 hour clock format e g 1300 for 1pm Display will automatically advance to step 5 5 Dial valid entry from above list for alarm type e g 2 DAILY OR Press UP or DOWN to select alarm type and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 6 Enter message using above method and press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 7 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data Alarms set to NOTSET Re
66. the alarm is unanswered by the door ring time out ringing will cease but the display will remain until cleared by dialling the alarm clear fea ture code 57 and passcode default 8765 PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 212 3501 ALARM RING Display shows first sensor 3501 on DCS system or D 500 500 351 on Compact Il system 2 Dial sensor number e g 3502 or 352 3502 ALARM RING OR D 500 500 Use UP or DOWN to scroll through sensor numbers and press RIGHT soft key to advance cursor 3 Enter valid ring destination for day e g 205 3502 ALARM RING OR D 205 500 Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to advance cursor Select night destination in the same way 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data All sensors ring 500 day night Related Items MMC 213 Alarm Message MMC 212 DCS Compact II Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 213 ALARM MESSAGE Des c x cu V 816 X 408 X 408 X Allows the assignment of a name to an alarm sensor Names are written using the dial keypad Each press of a key selects a character and moves the cursor to the
67. the completion of an outgoing call This table works in conjunction with LCR DIGIT TABLE LCR TIME TABLE LCR COS TABLE and LCR MODIFIED DIGITS TABLE After the user dials a valid digit string the sys tem uses the LCR ROUTE TABLE to select a specific predetermined trunk group A maximum of 16 routes are available beginning with ROUTE NUMBER 1 If more than one trunk group is avail able for call completion the system uses the first designated trunk group and then starts to util ise succeeding trunk groups If all trunk groups are busy in a selected route call queue becomes active and allocates trunks as they become available PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 712 LCR ROUTE 01 1 Display shows C1 6 9 001 2 Dial LCR ROUTE index number 1 16 e g 05 LCR ROUTE 05 1 OR C1 6 9 M 005 Press UP or DOWN to selected index and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Dial TIME BAND index number 1 4 0 2 LCR ROUTE 05 2 OR 1 G NONE M Press UP or DOWN to selected index and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 4 Dial LCR COS number 1 4 0 4 LCR ROUTE 05 2 OR C 4 G NONE M Press UP or DOWN to selected COS and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 5 Dial TRUNK GROUP access code e g
68. the enblock sending mode port by dialling the port number and the destination number followed by Incoming call routing This depends on the mode of BRI PRI setby MMC 419 420 See Table 6 Operational mode Associated table Note J PRI NOR MMC 406 This table has global meaning BRI P P NOR TRK RING applied to the ports setto DDI BRI P M NOR PRI DDI MMC 712 Same as above MSN DIGIT access Table 6 Incoming call routing according to MMC 419 420 BRI LT S Mode Note All of the following examples are valid only after programming with the appropriate MMC Refer to Part 4 of this manual Making a call from a DCS subscriber DGP SLT to an ISDN terminal attached to LT S port To call a terminal attached to an LT S port dial the MSN of the terminal If a terminal with MSN of 7803 is attached to 703 and you dialled 7803 a SETUP message will be sent out through 703 with calling party number of 7803 All terminals with MSN of 7803 will alert Alternatively to call a terminal or terminals dial the port number This time the calling party number of the SETUP message is vacant All the terminals attached to that port will alert with no regard to MSN number In the above cases dial is always sent in enblock mode Caution When making a call from an So terminal take care with the CLI number It is usually sent when the call is made and if that number is not registered in MMC 424 the system will disconnect the call M
69. to enter ex tender if required or to return to step 2 6 If required enter extender e g 03 205 KEY MAST OR 18 gt GPIK03 Press UP DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 7 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data All systems except 408 408i programmable keys 1 and 2 are set as CALL keys You are advised not to change these Defaults for 408 408i systems are shown in the 408 408i Installation Manual Each programmable key can be reprogrammed with one of the functions listed below Programmable Key Function Assignments x means a function is not available Desen 816 408 ANSWER RELEASE BARGE IN DR biRECTORY Lr DONOTDSTURB y Y Ll f DRECTPICKUP Y Y Y MMC 722 Page 2 of 3 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 816 408 408i CLIPINQURE O v X i NIGHT SERVICE NND CUP NAMENUMBERDAE _ 7 7 X PICKUP PAGE HOLD 7 REVIEW CLIP STATION GROUP STORE CLP EMULATION Related Items MMC 107 Key Extender MMC 722 Page 3 of 3 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING This MMC is similar to MMC 722 Station Key Programming The difference is that MMC 723 pr
70. to move the cursor to the left on the LCD The righthand soft key is des ignated as the RIGHT soft key This key is used to save any changed data while program ming or to move the cursor to gt lt WA 2 2 the right on the LCD lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt K DCS Euro Display Keysets 1 4 2 Other Keys The following keys perform special functions VOLUME DOWN Scroll up down through available options KEYPAD Enter data using keys 0 9 and and dial options HOLD Clear previous entry ANS RLS Select ALL option e g to make data apply to all rather than selected stations SPEAKER Store data and advance to next MMC TRSF Enter programming mode or Store data and exit programming mode Note Many MMCs allow you to dial codes using the keypad to select options quickly Alterna tively you can press the VOLUME Up and Down keys and to scroll through and select tions Use whichever method you prefer 1 3 DCS INTRODUCTION COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 The 6 12 or 24 extra programmable keys can be set up to perform specific functions when pressed during normal operation During programming some of these keys also perform other specific functions This is described in the individual MMC program pro cedure where applicable 1 5 Programming Procedures 1 5 1 Precautions When Programming The keyset must be on hook handset down to allo
71. to next MMC MMC 102 Page 1 of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 Default Data All stations 0 Forward Cancel Related Items MMC 301 Assign Station COS MMC 501 System Wide Timers MMC 502 Station Wide Timers MMC 701 Assign COS Contents MMC 722 Station Key Programming MMC 723 System Key Programming MMC 102 Page 2 of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 103 SET ANSWER MODE Allows the system administrator to change the answer mode of any keyset Each keyset can have its answer mode set to one of the following options 0 RING The keyset will ring in one of eight custom ring patterns Calls are answered by pressing the ANS RLS key or by lifting the handset 1 AUTO ANSWER After giving a short attention tone the keyset will automatically answer calls on the speakerphone When a C O line is transferred to a keyset in Auto Answer mode the screened portion of the call will be Auto Answer but the keyset will ring when the transfer is complete if the user has not pressed the ANS RLS key or lifted the handset 2 VOICE ANNOUNCE The keyset will not ring After a short attention tone callers can make an announc ement but the ANS RLS key or hand set must be used to answer calls PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Use
72. to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 416 701 TIE XLATE Display shows UNUSE DID TRANS 2 Enter desired trunk number e g 705 705 TIE XLATE OR UNUSE DID TRANS Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor OR OR ALL TIE XLATE UNUSE DID TRANS 3 Dial 0 or 1to select option e g 1 ALL TIE XLATE OR USE DID TRANS Press UP or DOWN key to make selection Press ANS RLS to select all trunks 3 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data UNUSE DID TRANS Related Items MMC 714 DDI Number and Name Translation MMC 416 DCS Compact II Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 417 CRC4 OPTION pcs 7 7 816 X 408i X 408 X This option is used to enable disable CRC4 generation and checking It is useful with some net works which do not support CRC4 framing but only PCM30 framing By default the CRC option is ON Note After changing this option MMC 418 Card Restart must be used to restart the card to make the change effective PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 417 701 PRICRC4 Display shows ON 2
73. to step 2 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC COMPACT PROCEDURE ACTION 1 Open programming and select 806 Display shows Press UP or DOWN key to select slot number Press RIGHT soft key to change previous card type Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC MMC 806 Page 1 of 2 Used to store data and advance to next MMC DISPLAY C1 01 INSTALL PRITRK gt PRITRK C3 01 INSTALL PRITRK PRITRK C3 05 DLI INSTALL gt DLI O SLI SLOT 2 79 gt lt 0 2511 gt 0 251 EXP 1SLOT 6DLI 8DLI EXP 1SLOT 8DLI 8DLI DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 m 816 PROCEDURE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 806 EXP SLOT Display shows NONE NONE 2 Press RIGHT soft key to change previous card type EXP SLOT NONE gt 8TRK 3 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data None Related Items None MMC 806 Page 2 of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 807 VOLUME CONTROL Allows the volume levels to be set the for the following keyset features KEY TONE NOISE THRES SIDE TONE ALC THRES HANDSET TX TX RX THRES MIC TX LEVEL TX RX COMP NOISE GUARD Caution You should only change these values under the supervision of Technical Support PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DO
74. transfer a call Simply hookflash receive transfer dial tone and dial the destination e Direct In Lines Any call can be assigned to ring at an individual station or a station hunt group assigned to the VM AA e Calls or Recalls to the Operator Dialling 0 will always result in a ringback signal If the operator is busy the call con tinues to ring in queue to the operator e Message Waiting A VM AA port can leave a message at any station or group of stations The message waiting indication can be set or cancelled at any station or station group with or with out the stations ringing DCS SPECIAL APPLICATIONS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 In Band Signalling Systems can be programmed to send the calling station s extension number after the voice mail system answers These DTMF signals may include a leading digit to indicate the type of call and additional information about the original caller DTMF signals may also be substituted for call progress tones to speed up voice mail call processing This program allows call forwarding to a mailbox and bypassing of the main greeting for automatic message retrieval Blind unscreened transfers may be performed because the recall will be correctly identified Note The effectiveness of this program depends on the ability of the voice mail system to make use of this information e Station Hunt Group With Overflow Each station group can have an individual overflow destination
75. trunk DISA Lock OutTimer NO Onlyforanalogueunk DiSAPassCheck NO Onyforanaoguetunk FmtDigitfim 7 merbgtrme CT o Inter Digit time in overlap send ing receiving Table 7 Related DCS timers Note These values can be changed in MMC 501 or 503 PRI and BRI LT T Port Call feature capability Implemented Noe Transfer Transfer to remote user through ISDN TRK is not allowed E with remote user through ISDN External Forward forward to remote user ES SMDR Toll Check Toll check through ISDN TRK port DISA Use an ISDN TRK as DISA outgoing line Table 8 Call feature abilities of PRI amp BRI LT T SMDR report ofthe calls through ISDN TRK port 3 14 DCS SPECIAL APPLICATIONS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC dependency Related Noe MMC 403 Trunk Toll Class MMC 404 Trunk Name HEEL 0 el MMC 404 Trunk Number For an outgoing call if there is no matching number in the DDI table this number will be used as calling party number MMC 406 Trunk Ring Assignment YES PRI Mode NOR BRI Mode P P NOR P M NOR 407 Forced Trunk Release MMC 408 Assign Trunk Music On YES Hold Source MMC 409 Trunk Status Read YES Displays the Cabinet Slot Port num bers MMC 410 Assign DISA Trunk YES ES MMC 412 Assign Trunk Signal Only for AC15 MMC 414 MPD PRS Signal Analogue only MMC 415 Report Trunk Abandon Y Data MMC 41
76. 00 100 3000 1000 3000 350 350 350 200 400 2000 250 1000 250 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 507 ASSIGN AUTO NIGHT TIME Enters the system into night mode automatically by utilising time and day tables A NIGHT key is not needed as the system will switch automatically However it is useful to have a dedicated key so the status can be manually changed if necessary The start time is the time the system switches from day to night service the end time is when it switches back from night to day ser vice e g start 1730 WED end 0800 THUR All times are entered 24 hour clock format e g 1730 is 5 30pm FEATURE KEYS 0 SUN 4 THU 1 MON 5 FRI 2 TUE 6 SAT 3 WED PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 507 NIGHT TIME SUN Display shows ST END 2 Dialday number 0 6 e g 3 NIGHT TIME WED OR ST END Press UP or DOWN key to select day and press RIGHT soft key to advance cursor 3 Dial in start time for night e g 1730 NIGHT TIME WED If time entered is valid cursor moves to end time ST 1730 END 0800 Enter end time e g 0800 If time entered is valid system returns to step 2 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to n
77. 01 3 a 1 Press UP or DOWN key to choose item CHANNEL ANY BRI MODE DLSEND BRI CODING BRI MODE P P DDI Press RIGHT soft key to move the cursor ES Use UP or DOWN key to select option e g P P DDI for BRI MODE If you press RIGHT soft key cursor moves under trunk number step 3 a If you press LEFT soft key cursor returns to option e g BRI MODE 3 a 2 For other items repeat step 3 a 1 703 BRFTRK CHANNEL ANY YES 3 a 3 For another port repeat from step 2 When finished go to step 4 3 b Display is as shown for STATION ports 703 BRI STN CHANNEL ANY YES 3 b 1 Press UP or DOWN key to choose item CHANNEL ANY POWER FEED DCS Compact Il only BRI COD ING Press RIGHT soft key to move cursor and make selec tion 3 b 2 For other items repeat step 3 b 1 3 b 3 For another port repeat from step 2 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data CHANNEL ANY YES BRI MODE P P DDI DLSEND OVERLAP POWER FEED NO BRI CODING A LAW Related Items MMC 418 Card Restart MMC 421 MSN Digit MMC 423 S T Mode MMC 714 DDI Number and Name Translation MMC 419 Page 3 of 3 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 420 PRI OPTION bes X V 816 X 408 X 408 Allows the system DDI NORMAL access and sets dial sending mode DLSEND on an individual port basis to OVERLAP or ENBLOCK However if you change the dial sending m
78. 01 So Overview Contents IrnitrodUuctiOn 3 9 Specifications eese nennen nnn nnn 3 9 m 3 9 pesti ceno aucun Pee 3 9 ISDN SertVICGS 3 10 Installation 3 12 Operation eese eene nennen nennen nn nnn nnn nnn 3 12 PO Mace bett esse 3 12 PRI and BRI LT T Mode 3 13 BRI ET S MOdG coe tette eee eee 3 13 Features Reference Tables eene 3 14 Related Timers eite reet Dn a re 3 14 PRI and BRI LT T 3 14 PRI and BRI LT S 2 10 3 16 Pin Assignment of Connectors een 3 16 3 16 a 3 16 BRI Related MMC Procedure nnn 3 18 3 8 DCS SPECIAL APPLICATIONS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 Introduction In the DCS there are two line cards for ISDN One is the PRI card containing one Primary Rate Interface the other is the BRIN card containing four Basic Rate Interfaces For Com pact I and and 816 systems there are two types of BRI card one with two BRI access the other with four The following topics are covered Hardware specification of each card Installation
79. 02 TOLL DENY TABLE Makes toll restriction call barring easy and flexible There are 500 entries for DCS 001 500 200 entries for Compact I and 816 001 200 and 100 entries for 408 408i 001 100 allowed in the Deny Table Each entry index up to 12 digits can be assigned to a class of service With the use of wild cards see MMC 704 Assign Wild Character more flexibility can be built into toll re striction Wild cards can be used repeatedly in the dial string limited only to what is allowed or denied in MMC 704 There are six toll levels B to G that are programmable Toll level A is set as unrestricted by default and toll level H is set as internal calls only by default PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry WILD CARD KEYS Key No Wild Card Depends on keyset type 19 24B or 7 12B or 1 6B X 20 24B or 8 12B or 2 6B Y 21 24B or 9 12B or 3 6B 2 DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 702 DENY 001 BCDEFG Display shows 000000 2 Dial entry number e g 005 DENY 005 BCDEFG OR 000000 Press UP DOWN key to select index and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor and enter toll pattern via dial pad e g 212 DENIQO2 BODES OR 212 000000 Enter wild card e g 21X and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor to COS opt
80. 1 BASE OSLI MISC 08 or 4SLI 01 04 04 or 4SLI 01 04 EX1 7 Port 1 16 TENANT NUMBER 1 2 dc Type of phone nus Type of phone aur Type of phone e g 12B EU e g 12B EU e g 12B EU TYPE Type of phone PICKUP GROUP PICKUP GROUP PICKUP GROUP e g 12B 24B None 01 20 None 01 08 None 01 04 3 PICKUP GROUP None SGR Station Group SGR Station Group SGR Station Group 01 20 Number Number Number SGR Station Group BOSS SECR None BOSS SECR None BOSS SECR None Number BOSS SECR BOSS SECR BOSS SECR 5 BOSS SECR None PAGE Page Zone PAGE Page Zone PAGE Page Zone BOSS SECR None 1 4 None 1 4 None 1 2 PAGE Page Zone DAY COS NO COS DAY COS COS DAY COS NO COS None 1 4 01 30 01 10 1 4 7 DAY COS NO COS NIGHT COS NO COS NIGHT COS NO COS NIGHT COS NO COS 01 30 01 30 01 10 1 4 NIGHT COS NO COS 01 30 PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to advance to next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 108 201 STN STATUS Display shows first station e g for Compact 11 PORT NO BASEO1 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 STN STATUS OR PORT 1 01 Press UP or DOWN to select station and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Dial 0 8 using table above to select station status 205 STN STATUS option PICKUP GROUP 01 OR Press UP or DOWN to sel
81. 1 of Compact Il Tx and Rx has no polarity 816 Function Colour Colour Function Tx of P1 Rx of P1 Tx of P2 Rx of P2 Tx of P3 Rx of P3 Tx of P4 Rx of P4 Tx of P1 Rx of P1 Tx of P2 Rx of P2 Tx of P3 Rx of P3 Tx of P4 Rx of P4 Table 14 Champ connector pin assignment Note Tx and Rx has no polarity 816 3 17 DCS SPECIAL APPLICATIONS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 RJ 45 pin assignment for BRI User Side LT T PinNumber NT Side LT S TX 3 Rx Rx 4 Tx Rx 5 Tx TX 6 Rx Table 15 Pin assignment of RJ 45 for BRI Note DCS 408 and 408i users should refer to the Installation Manual provided with their system for details of pin connections for BRI Making an RJ 45 connector extension to BRI As shown in Table 15 LT S NT side and LT T User side have different pin assignments in RJ 45 You can use the pin assignment tables 11 14 with Table 15 according to the func tion of the BRI port You should connect pins with the pins in Table 15 that have the same name Note RJ 45 sockets come in different styles which look similar However pin numbers may be ter minated in different places Therefore always check the pin numbers on your connectors BRI Related MMC Procedure There are several MMCs related to BRI cards Because some MMCs have dependencies on other MMCs it could become cumbersome to do MMC programming correctly You should therefore program these MM
82. 205 205 CO CONFIRM OR NONE Press UP or DOWN key to select station and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Diala feature option 0 2 e g 1 205 CO CONFIRM OR CONFIRM TONE Press UP or DOWN key to select option and press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data NONE Related Items MMC 501 System Wide Timers MMC 314 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 315 SET RELOCATION Des c x cu V 816 V 408i v 408 Used when a station moves its phone to another location a different port All relevant data for the phone are moved to the new location automatically ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 315 SET RELOCATION Display shows EXT_ EXT 2 Dial the original station number e g 205 SET RELOCATION OR EXT205 EXT Press UP or DOWN key to select station and press RIGHT soft key 3 Dialthe new location s station number e g 210 SET RELOCATION EXT205 EXT210 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data None Related Items None MMC 315 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 316 COPY STATION USABLE Des c x cu V 816 V 408 X 408 X Copy the condition of station trunk usability and station station usability from one station to an o
83. 37 DECT System Code has ENABLE DECT REG not been set this message will be displayed NO REG SYSTEM ID 3 Dial 1 for ENABLE or 0 for DISABLE ENABLE DECT REG OR ENABLE Press UP or DOWN key to select and press RIGHT soft key 4 Press TRSF key to exit OR Press SPEAKER button to store and advance to next MMC Default Data DISABLE Related Items MMC 202 Change Feature Passcodes MMC 737 DECT System Code MMC 738 DECT Clear Registration MMC 739 BSI Download MMC 741 BSI Card Restart MMC 742 BSI Status MMC 743 DBS Status MMC 745 BSI Carrier MMC 744 DCS Compact II Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 745 BSI CARRIER Des c v cm V 816 X 408i X 408 x A base station uses one of 10 channels FDMA technology This MMC is used to allow or deny the use of each channel carrier By default all carriers can be used by a base station Options 1 Carrier can be used 0 Carrier cannot be used PROGRAM KEYS KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 745 The display shows the status of each carrier 0 9 CARS 0123456789 SELS 1111111111 If 1 is shown below a carrier this carrier can be used by the base station If 0 is shown below a carrier this carrier cannot be used by the base station 2 Dial 1 0 for each
84. 4 Carry out related MMC programming according to your intended use ofthe card 5 Run MMC 418 Card Restart Note n DCS both BRI and PRI must be installed in the Basic Key Service Unit not the Expansion Cabinet The PRI card must be installed in the first slot with the next even numbered slot empty 1000 line termination may not be present on the BRI card If not termination should be provided somewhere outside the BRI card n BRI LT T and LT S mode can be selected only by MMC programming However you should connect the Tx and Rx cable pair from MDF correctly Tx and Rx connections are reversed be tween LT T and LT S mode see Table 15 Operation Ports After installation the system allocates a port number to each B channel in exactly the same way as the analogue trunk case Thus a BRI will be assigned eight port numbers while a PRI will be assigned 30 Note To avoid confusion the words port and access are used here with different meanings Port is used to specify one B channel while access specifies one BRI span which consists of two B channels and one D channel 3 12 DCS SPECIAL APPLICATIONS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 PRI amp BRI LT T Mode Making an outgoing call Overlap sending You can seize a port by dialling the port number e g 701 When you see SETUP ACK dis played on your keyset you can dial the destination number Enblock sending You can make a call through
85. 4 STN DIAL NUMBER Display shows e g for Compact II 5 01 201 gt 2 Enter option number 0 8 0 6 FEAT DIAL NUMBER OR ABAND 645 Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key 3 Use dial keypad to select feature e g DICT FEAT DIAL NUMBER OR DICT NONE _ Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to advance cursor 4 Enter digits e g 68 via dial keypad FEAT DIAL NUMBER DICT gt 68 5 Press LEFT soft key to enter change and continue to make changes OR Press RIGHT soft key to enter and return to step 2 SAME DIAL EXIST If an error message appears indicating duplication of CHANGE Y 1 N 0 access code Enter 1 for YES change OR 0 for NO no change 6 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data Feature Codes ABAND 64 HDSET None SNR 17 ABS None HLDPK 12 SPEED 16 ACCT 47 HOLD 11 UA 67 ALMCLR 57 IG 53 VDIAL 681 AUTH LCR VMADM None BARGE None LISTN None VMAME None BLOCK None LNR 19 VMMEMO None BOSS None MMPA 56 VMMSG None CAMP 45 MMPG 54 VREC 682 CANMG 42 MSG 43 WCOS 59 CBK 44 MYGRPK None CONF 46 NEW None CR None NIGHT None DICT None OHVA None DIR None OPER 0 9 DIRPK 65 PAGE 55 DISALM 58 PAGPK 10 DLOCK 13 PARK None DND 40 PAUSE None DNDOVER None PMSG 48 FAUTO 14 REJ ECT None FLASH 49 SELFID None FWD 60 SETMG 41 GRPK 66 SLTMMC 15 Related Items All programs and features MMC 724 Page 2 of 2 DCS
86. 6 Assign AC15 Translation MMC 417 PRI CRC4 Option MMC 418 Card Restart Restarts PRI or BRI MMC 419 BRI Option MMC 420 PRI Option MMC 421 MSN Digit BRI Mode P M MSN MMC 422 Assign Trunk COS MMC 423 S T Mode nly for BRI MMC 424 S0 Mapping nly for BRI S port MMC 508 Call Cost MMC 509 Tone Cadence NO Only for Analogue trunk MMC 603 Assign Trunk Group MMC 702 Toll Deny Table MMC 703 Toll Allowance Table MMC 714 DDI Table YES PRI DDI BRI P P DDI Table 9 MMC dependency O YES Joo OE MMC 411 E1TRK Signal O NO __ E No NO Only for AC15 MMC 407 Forced Trunk Release MMC 410 Assign DISA Trunk 411 5 MMC 412AssignTrunkSignal MMC 414 Signal Analogue only MMC 416 Assign 15 Translation OnlyforaCis MMC 417 PRI CRC4 Option p MMC 418 Card Restat Restarts PRIorBRI MMC 419BRI Option ee MMC 420 PRI Option MMC 421MSN Digit BRiMode P MMSN MMC 422 AssignTrunkCOS p MMC 423S TMode MMC 42450 MMC508CallCost _ _ O 509 C O Tone Cadence Only for Analogue trunk MMC 603 Assign Trunk Group _ fe ee MMC 702 Toll Deny Table Oooo O MMC 703 Toll Allowance Table een bl 3 15 DCS SPECIAL APPLICATIONS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 PRI and BRI LT S Port Call feature capability For LT S po
87. 7 FORCED TRUNK RELEASE 408 ASSIGN TRUNK MUSIC ON HOLD SOURCE mepeamesma t pv pvp spee Las weeosrmuwsemeoom y v v x sommes as assenso v D y px pps __ econ 2 5 DCS DEFAULT DATA COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 pes en T s 419 BRIOPTION Y Y Y Y Y CHANNEL ANY YES BRI MODE P P DDI DLSEND OVERLAP BRI CODING A LAW POWERFEED NO PRI OPTION CHANNEL ANY YES PRI MODE DDI DLSEND OVERLAP MSNDGT DIGIT ER Feel a NONE Lu PU TRUNK COS DAY a 1 NIGHT CLASS 1 ro Re ame EE pepe pep pense ax psu pepe o pepe sas 9 Ds ssmewecwwes v vr 501 SYSTEM WIDE TIMERS SEE TABLE OF TIMERS AND VALUES IN MMC 501 502 STATION WIDE TIMERS Y NO ANS FWD 015 SEC DTMF DURATION 100 MS FIRST DGT DELAY 600MS TRUNK WIDE TIMERS Y Y Y Y Y Y 5 600 5 CLEARING 002 SEC CO SUPV TM 400 MS DTMF DURATION 100 MS FIRST DGT DELAY 600MS FLASH TIME 070 MS NO RING TM 004 SEC PAUSE TIME 003 SEC PRS DET TM 000 MS RNG DET TM 300 MS WINK 200 MS MF DP INT TM 0800 MS MFR DLY TM 000 SEC MAKE BREAK 33 PULSES PER SECOND 10 FOLLOWS S W VERSION RELEASE DATE EBENEN PULSE MAKE BREAK RATIO EIS 505 ASSIGN DATE AND
88. 8 TRKGRP03 089 TRKGRP04 090 096 097 UNCO CNF 098 099 100 5 NOVEMBER 2001 Page zone 1 PAGING Page zone 2 PAGING Page zone 3 PAGING Page zone 4 PAGING Page zone 5 PAGING Not used Page zone PAGING Call pickup Override secure System speed dial toll check Station locking Station group 01 calling Station group 02 calling Station group 03 calling Station group 04 calling Station group 05 calling Station group 06 calling Station group 07 calling Station group 08 calling Station group 09 calling Station group 10 calling Not used System speed dial Not used Trunk group 01 calling Trunk group 02 calling Trunk group 03 calling Trunk group 04 calling Not used CO to CO conference Not used Absence 4 408 4081 COS FEATURE LIST BY OPTION NUMBER 408i 408 02 02 AUTO RDL 03 03 CALLBACK 04 CLIP ABN 05 CLIP INQ 06 CLIP INV 07 04 CONFER 08 05 DALM CLR 09 06 DAY NIG 10 07 DIRECT 12 09 DND 13 10 DND OVRD 15 12 DOOR 16 13 DSS 17 14 DTS 18 15 EXT FWD 19 16 FEATURE 20 17 FLASH 21 18 FOLLOW ME 22 19 FORWARD 23 20 GRP 24 21 HOLD 25 22 HOT LINE 26 23 INTERCOM 27 24 MESSAGE 28 25 MM PAGE 29 26 NEW CALL 30 27 OHVAED Retry on busy Callback CLIP abandoned 408i only CLIP inquiry for review 408i only CLIP investigate 408i only Conference DISA alarm ring clear Change day night mode Directory dial Do Not Disturb DND Override Door ring answer
89. 9 LCR ROUTE 05 2 OR 4 6 9 Press UP or DOWN to selected access code and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 6 Dial MODIFY DIGITS index number 001 100 LCR ROUTE 05 2 e g 050 C 4 6 9 050 OR Press UP or DOWN to selected index number and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor OR Press RIGHT soft key to leave entry unchanged eo ROUTER 2 C 4 G 9 M MMC 712 Page 1 of 2 DCS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL 7 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data ROUTE TIME BAND COS TRK GRP 01 16 1 1 9 Related Items MMC 310 LCR Class Of Service MMC 710 LCR Digit Table MMC 711 LCR Time Table MMC 713 LCR Modify Digit Table MMC 712 Page 2 of 2 MMC PROGRAMS NOVEMBER 2001 MODIFY TBL INDEX 001 016 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE Also referred to as Outdial Rules this enables the system to add or delete a digit string or single digit if needed to complete a call e g adding a digit 1 The characters and can also be entered Option Max No of Digit Entries Number of digits to delete 15 Insert before dialling string 14 Append after dialling string 14 Digit String Key Insert String Digit String delete Append String PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store da
90. A MSG to be used as a Music On Hold MOH source Note that AA card port numbers differ between systems see Part 2 section 2 3 System Configuration Quick Reference PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEY Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 736 3958 SET AAMOH Display shows e g DCS MOH MSG NOT USE 2 Press RIGHT soft key to select MOH message 3958 SET AAMOH MOH MSG NOT USE 3 Dial AA message number for 01 64 e g 20 3958 SET AAMOH MOH MSG 20 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data NOT USE Related Items None MMC 736 Page of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 737 DECT SYSTEM CODE Des 1 v 816 x 408i x 408 Used to identify your DECT system and the handsets you register with your system The DECT System Code for your system is made up of two fields the System ID which is three hexadecimal digits in the range 001 to 999 and the Auth Code short for Authentication Code which is four hexadecimal digits in the range 0000 to 9999 The default values are 000 and FFFF respectively Important You must use this MMC to change the default values for the values you have been provided with by your su
91. AL NOVEMBER 2001 755 VM ALARM Cadence amp SVMi 4 pcs x cm V s16 X 408i x 408 X Generates an alarm message in a mailbox defined in MMC 753 when the Cadence card hard disk drive or SVMi 4 card flash memory reaches a selected threshold percentage of capacity You select the threshold in this MMC the range is 00 9996 For example if you select a threshold of 70 an alarm message is generated if more than 7096 of capacity is reached PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 755 VM ALARM Display shows THRESHOLD 80 2 Enter new threshold value using keypad e g 85 VM ALARM OR THRESHOLD 85 Press UP or DOWN key to select threshold value Press RIGHT soft key 3 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data THRESHOLD 80 Related Items Cadence programming SVMi 4 programming MMC 755 DCS Compact II Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 756 ASSIGN VM Cadence amp SVMi 4 pcs V a x 7 s16 x 4081 X 408 X Assigns a Cadence or SVMi 4 port as a Music On Hold MOH source Once assigned the port cannot be used for AA VM applications PROGRAM
92. ANGE PASSCODE Press RIGHT soft key to move cursor to passcode entry ALARM CLR 8765 3 Enter new passcode via digits from CHANGE PASSCODE dial keypad ALARM CLR 9999 Press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 Continue to change other passcodes 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data DAY NIGHT 0000 DISA ALARM 5678 ALARM CLR 8765 AA RECORD 4321 DECT REGISTER 4321 Related Items MMC 212 Alarm Ringing Station MMC 214 DISA Alarm Ringing Station MMC 410 Assign DISA Trunk MMC 507 Assign Auto Night Time MMC 737 DECT System Code MMC 744 BSI Registration On Off MMC 202 Pages 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 203 ASSIGN UA DEVICE Assigns the ringing device to be accessed when a Universal Answer UA key is pressed or the UA pickup code is dialled UA assignment is made in MMC 601 Assign Station Group for a group and then the group is entered here The UA device can be one of the device types listed below The device type is automatically determined by the directory number DN entered DIRECTORY NUMBER DN DEVICE TYPE DESCRIPTION 201 349 201 308 201 216 21 28 STATION 3601 3602 361 365 361 362 Ring over page STATION The UA device is a station 500 529 500 519 500 509 50 53 GROUP group Note Only one of the above options can be selected If the ability to ring more than one item e g all four ex
93. AR MEMORY restarts the system and clears all memory The second method RESET SYSTEM restarts the system only If CLEAR MEMORY is selected system data will return to default values Note You do not need to enable system programming MMC 800 in order to run this program but you will still require the technician s passcode WARNING Extreme care should be taken when using this MMC If the system is restarted all voice data connections are dropped If memory is cleared all customer data is deleted and the system returns to default status PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 811 SYSTEM RESTART Display shows RESET SYSTEM NO 2 Press UP or DOWN key to make selection SYSTEM RESTART RESET SYSTEM or CLEAR MEMORY CLEAR MEMORY NO After selection is made press RIGHT soft key to move cursor to YES NO option 3 Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press SYSTEM RESTART RIGHT soft key CLEAR MEMORY YES 4 Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press SYSTEM RESTART RIGHT soft key ARE YOU SURE YES Warning Selecting CLEAR MEMORY will erase all data in the system and return default values If RESET SYSTEM is selected system will return to nor mal programmed status Default Data None Related Items None MMC 811 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NO
94. Allows the following features to be enabled on individual stations ACCESS DIAL MICROPHONE OFF HOOK RING SMDR PRINT TGR ADV TONE VMAA FORWARD STN CALL PRT FWD DLY USE PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN KEYPAD SOFT KEYS SPEAKER HOLD ANS RLS Determines whether a user can select a trunk or trunk group by dial ling its directory number DN This selection should be turned OFF when using LCR Allows keyset to be used in speakerphone mode Allows a short burst of ring tone to indicate another call When this is set OFF C O calls to and from the station will not print on SMDR This includes transferred calls or calls picked up from hold or park When this feature is set to ON a warning tone will be heard each time LCR advances to the next route When this feature is set to ON it allows calls to be forwarded to voice mail Allows print out of station to station call When this feature is set to ON calls will overflow to Forward No swer destination when the Forward No Answer timer expires even when the Forward No Answer feature is not activated at the called party extension Set Forward No Answer destination in MMC 102 Call Forward but do not enable the feature Alternatively use code 603 plus the sta tion number then code 600 to cancel the feature Used to scroll through options Used to enter selections Move cursor left and right Used to store data and advance to next MMC Used to clear previous
95. CLASS Press ANS RLS to select ALL D F STN N F STN 3 Enter day toll class e g 2 for CLS B 704 TOLL CLASS OR D CLS B N F STN Press UP or DOWN to scroll through toll classes and use RIGHT soft key to move the cursor 4 Enter night toll class e g 2 704 TOLL CLASS OR D CLS B N CLS B Press UP or DOWN to scroll through toll classes and use RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 5 Press TRSF to store data and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store data and advance to next MMC MMC 403 Page 1 of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 Default Data All trunks F STN day night Related Items MMC 301 Assign Station COS MMC 507 Assign Auto Night Time MMC 701 Assign COS Contents Toll Restriction MMC 403 Page 2 of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 404 Allows a name up to 11 characters to be entered to identify an individual trunk Names are written using the keypad Each key press selects a character and moves the cursor to the next position For example if the name is TELECOMS press the number 8 once to get the letter T Now press the number 3 twice to get the letter E Continue selecting characters from the keypad to complete the name Press the programmable A key to toggle between up per and lower case text Tip When the character you want is on the same key as the previous character you typed in press the UP key to move the
96. Cs in a pre defined order as described in this section Be sure to follow this order or some ofthe MMC data will be lost 3 18 DCS SPECIAL APPLICATIONS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 Order of Programming Carry out programming as shown in the diagram below MMC 423 S T mode MMC 424 S0 Mapping NOTE 1 MMC 419 BRI TRK NOTE 2 MMC 419 BRI STN NOTE 2 MMC 421 MSN Digit NOTE 3 MMC 418 Card Restart Program MSN in your ISDN terminal NOTE 4 Note 1 This item does not have to be programmed prior to MMC 419 or MMC 418 because those MMCs have no effect on this item However this item must be preceded by MMC 423 2 This item displays its name as BRI TRK or BRI STN according to the port setting in MMC 423 3 This item is only applicable when a BRI access is programmed as P MP MSN in MMC 419 4 Only for a STATION port set in MMC 423 Example of programming a STATION port Assume that you have a BRI card installed in DCS and its ports are numbered from 701 to 708 You wantto use the 4th BRI access 707 and 708 as a STATION portto connect ISDN terminals The procedure is 3 19 DCS SPECIAL APPLICATIONS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 Step 1 Select the functional mode of that port as STATION in MMC 423 S T Mode You can set either 707 or 708 to STATION Step 2 Choose whether you want to supply power to that BRI access or not If you do set the P
97. DOWN Used to scroll through options move cursor left or right KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry Key 19 24B keyset or key 7 12 keyset or key 1 6B keyset toggles upper case and lower case ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 405 Display shows Dial trunk e g 704 OR Press UP or DOWN to select trunk and press RIGHT Soft key to move the cursor Enter the trunk number Press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 OR Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data No numbers entered Related Items MMC 404 Trunk Name MMC 405 Page 1 of 1 701 CO TEL NO 704 CO TEL NO 704 CO TEL NO 3054264100 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 406 TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT Enables ringing to a specific station or a group of stations or an auto attendant for systems other than 408 408i when incoming calls are received This MMC controls both day and night loca tions DEVICE DEFAULT DIRECTORY NO Compacti 486 1 408 408i 201 349 201 308 201 216 21 28 500 529 500 519 500 509 50 53 Aa 07 qL 399 p 39 0 PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and
98. Dial volume level using keypad you will hear a brieftone 205 STN VOLUME for the level you select and system returns to step 3 OFF RING VOL 3 OR Press UP or DOWN to select volume you will hear a brief tone for each level and press RIGHT soft key to return to step 3 5 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data Ring Volume 4 Off Hook Ring Volume 4 Handset Volume 4 Speaker Volume 13 BGM Volume 13 Related Items MMC 111 Keyset Ring Tone MMC 114 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 115 SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE Allows the system administrator to set a programmed message at individual or all keysets There are 20 messages available 01 20 These messages are as set up in MMC 715 Programmed Station Message PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 115 201 PGMMSG 00 Display shows CANCEL PGM MSG 2 Dialstation number e g 205 205 PGMMSG 00 OR CANCEL PGM MSG Press UP or DOWN to select station and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor OR ALL PGMMSG Press ANS RLS to select All 3 Dial 01 20 to select message number e g 05 205 PGMMSG 05 OR PAGE ME Press UP or DO
99. EBEREN NONE FOR MASTER 210 CUSTOMER ON OFF 210 211 DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT Een oe STATION GROUP 500 or 50 212 ALARM RINGING STATION ALL SENSORS RING 500 DAY NIGHT 213 ALARM MESSAGE Py NONE 214 DISA ALARM RINGING STATION EGRE AR DAY NIGHT 500 or 50 215 VOICE DIALLER OPTIONS Py Nn oN INI 2CH 7USER 20BIN 216 VOICE DIALLER ASSIGNMENTS PY un on on 217 CCC OPTION PN fon oN NONE 219 COMMON RELAY SERVICE TYPE SEE MMC 219 Y Y Y Y STN CALL PRT OFF FWD DLY USE OFF OTHER FEATURES SET TO ON ASSIGN STATION COS Y Y Y Y DAY CLASS 1 NIGHT CLASS 1 PICKUP GROUPS 303 ASSIGN BOSS SECRETARY 304 ASSIGN STATION TRUNK USE 305 ASSIGN FORCED CODE 306 HOT LINE 308 ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE 309 ASSIGN STATION MUSIC ON HOLD 310 LCR CLASS OF SERVICE 301 302 2 4 DCS DEFAULT DATA COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 ASSIGN SIM PARAMETER SIM TYPE DTE CALL MODE MANUAL ANS MODE MANUAL AUTO BAUD ON DTR CHECK ECHO ON PROTOCOL V110 SPEED 9600 CHAR LENGTH 8 BITS PARITY NONE STOP BIT 1 312 ALLOW CLIP 313 ASSIGN PIN CODE CUSTOMER ON OFF PER TRUNK 1A2 EMULATE OFF TRUNK INC DND OFF TRUNK FORWARD ON LCR ALLOW OFF o e 401 C OJPBX LINE 402 TRUNK DIAL TYPE 403 TRUNK TOLL CLASS 404 TRUNK NAME 05 TRUNK NUMBER 06 TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT 40
100. EYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 809 SYS MMC LANGUAGE Display shows ENGLISH 2 Press UP or DOWN to make selection and SYS MMC LANGUAGE press RIGHT soft key DANISH 3 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data ENGLISH Related Items Multi Language MMC 809 Page of 1 DCS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL MMC 810 Used only in the event that all data processing needs to be stopped in either a single cabinet or MMC PROGRAMS NOVEMBER 2001 HALT PROCESSING EM NNNM 7 cn V s16 V 408i x 408 x slot or in the entire system The procedure differs slightly between systems Note You do not need to enable system programming MMC 800 in order to run this program but you will still require the technician s passcode PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC ANS RLS Used to select ALL m DCS PROCEDURE ACTION 1 2 2b Open programming and select 810 Display shows Enter cabinet selection via dial keypad OR Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to advance cursor Press ANS RLS to select all cabinets and all slots Enter slot number via dial ke
101. Enter code index number e g 2 PBX ACCESS CODE OR 2 Press UP or DOWN key to make selection Press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 4 Enter via dial keypad the desired access feature code PBX ACCESS CODE max 4 digits e g 9 2 9 5 Press RIGHT soft key to return to step 3 and enter another index OR Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data None Related Items MMC 702 Toll Deny Table MMC 703 Toll Allowance Table MMC 709 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE The LCR DIGIT TABLE contains all numerical digits for the completion of outgoing call place ment This table works in conjunction with LCR ROUTE TABLE LCR TIME TABLE and LCR MOD IFY DIGITS TABLE Maximum number of entries is DCS amp Compactil 816 4086 408i Digit string length is 10 numerical digits This system automatically maintains entered digit strings in numerical order The characters and are also accepted for use with feature codes PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 710 LCR DIGIT 001 Display shows DIGIT 2 Dial LCR entry see above e g 005 LCR DIGIT 005 OR DIGIT _ Press UP or DOWN to
102. Enter first trunk number in PRI card e g 701 701 PRI CRC4 OR ON Press UP or DOWN key to select first trunk number and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Enter 1 for ON or 0 for OFF 701 PRI CRC4 OR OFF Press UP or DOWN key to select and press RIGHT soft key 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data CRC4 Related Items MMC 418 Card Restart MMC 417 DCS Compact II Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 418 CARD RESTART bes j cm v 816 V 408i 408 Enables any changes you make in MMC 417 PRI CRC4 Option MMC 419 BRI Option MMC 420 PRI Option or MMC 423 S T Mode and applies them as appropriate to each BRI or PRI card that you restart Note PRI is not available on 816 or 408i systems PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 418 701 RESTART Display shows CARD RESTART NO 2 Enter first trunk number in ISDN card e g 701 701 RESTART OR CARD RESTART NO Press UP or DOWN key to select first trunk number and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Press UP or DOWN key to select YES or NO and 701 RESTART press RIGHT soft key CARD RESTART YES
103. F to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data All trunks DTMF Related Items MMC 501 System Wide Timers MMC 503 Trunk Wide Timers MMC 402 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 403 TRUNK TOLL CLASS Assigns toll class level assignments on a per trunk or all trunk basis in a day or night condition The options for toll level will follow either the station class or the class of service defined in MMCs 702 Toll Deny Table and 703 Toll Allowance Table The toll classes available are listed below ENTRY NUMBER CLASS TYPE DESCRIPTION 0 F STN Follow station toll restriction 1 CLS A Follow toll class A Unrestricted 2 CLS B Follow toll class B 3 CLS C Follow toll class C 4 CLS D Follow toll class D 5 CLS E Follow toll class E 6 CLS F Follow toll class F 7 CLS G Follow toll class G 8 CLS H Follow toll class H All restricted PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 403 701 TOLL CLASS Display shows D F STN N F STN 2 Dial trunk number 9 704 704 TOLL CLASS OR D F STN N F STN Use UP or DOWN to scroll through trunk numbers and press RIGHT soft key to move the cursor OR OR ALL TOLL
104. G MANUAL Related Items MMC 738 MMC 739 MMC 741 MMC 742 MMC 743 MMC 744 MMC 745 MMC PROGRAMS NOVEMBER 2001 DECT Clear Registration BSI Download BSI Card Restart BSI Status DBS Status BSI Registration On Off BSI Carrier MMC 737 DCS Compact II Page 2 of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 738 DECT CLEAR REGISTRATION bes c j cm V 816 X 408i X 408 Used to delete previously registered information for DECT handsets This MMC has two modes Q FORCED When this mode is programmed the system clears the registered information by force NORMAL Whenever the system wants to clear the registration of a DECT handset the dele tion must be confirmed from the handset If the confirmation is successful the system clears the registered information If the confirmation fails the system cannot clear the information PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 738 7901 DECT CLEAR Display shows MODE FORCED 2 Enter the number of DECT handset to clear via dial 7901 DECT CLEAR keypad and press the RIGHT soft key to move the MODE FORCED cursor 3 Select the de registration clear mode via UP or 7901 DECT CLEAR DOWN key e g Normal and
105. GRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 214 DISA ALARM RINGING STATION Assigns the DISA alarm to ring at a specific phone It is recommended that the person who clear the alarm also receives the notification Both a day and a night destination can be selected A valid destination can be DEVICE DEFAULT DIRECTORY NUMBER 2655 Compacti 86 408 408 201 349 201 308 201 216 21 28 500 529 500 519 500 509 50 53 PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 214 DISA ALARM RING Display shows D 500 N 500 2 Enterin valid day destination number e g 212 DISA ALARM RING OR D 212 N 500 Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to advance cursor 3 Enterin valid night destination number e g 205 DISA ALARM RING OR D 212 N 205 Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data Day 500 50 for 408 408i Night 500 50 for 408 4081 Related Items MMC 202 Change Feature Passcodes MMC 410 Assign DISA Trunk MMC 214 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 215 VOICE DIALLER OPTIONS
106. I DLSEND OVERLAP Related Items MMC 418 Card Restart MMC 406 Trunk Ring Assignment MMC 714 DDI Number and Name Translation MMC 420 DCS Compact II Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 421 MSN DIGIT bes j cm v 816 7 408i 408 Provides a method of assigning an incoming MSN call to a specific station If any entry in MSN DIGIT TABLE matches an incoming call s called party number either the specific station is alerted if it is programmed to accept the call or the call is cleared if it is programmed to reject the call If the incoming called party number does not have a matching entry in the MSN table the opera tor is alerted You can give each MSN number to a specific station and you can select a call waiting option when a destination is busy the incoming call must be cleared or camped on to the station which is alerted to the call There is a total of eight entries on a trunk basis and each entry consists of the following fields DIGITS DAY DEST NIGHT DEST CALL WAIT OPTION Digits to be received maximum of 10 Destination in day mode can be a station or a station group Repeat B will be acceptable to the system if received digit is within numbering plan for a station or station group Destination in night mode can be a station or a station group Repeat B will be acceptable to the system if received digit i
107. ING Page zone 9 PAGING Page zone PAGING Call pickup Override secure System speed dial toll check Station locking Station group 01 calling Station group 02 calling Station group 03 calling Station group 04 calling Station group 05 calling Station group 06 calling Station group 07 calling Station group 08 calling Station group 09 calling MMC 701 Page 2 of 7 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 063 STNGRP 10 Station group 10 calling 064 STNGRP 11 Station group 11 calling 065 STNGRP 12 Station group 12 calling 066 STNGRP 13 Station group 13 calling 067 STNGRP 14 Station group 14 calling 068 STNGRP 15 Station group 15 calling 069 STNGRP 16 Station group 16 calling 070 STNGRP 17 Station group 17 calling 071 STNGRP 18 Station group 18 calling 072 STNGRP 19 Station group 19 calling 073 STNGRP 20 Station group 20 calling 074 STNGRP 21 Station group 21 calling 075 STNGRP 22 Station group 22 calling 076 STNGRP 23 Station group 23 calling 077 STNGRP 24 Station group 24 calling 078 STNGRP 25 Station group 25 calling 079 STNGRP 26 Station group 26 calling 080 STNGRP 27 Station group 27 calling 081 STNGRP 28 Station group 28 calling 082 STNGRP 29 Station group 29 calling 083 STNGRP 30 Station group 30 calling 084 Not used 085 SYS SPD System speed dial 087 TRKGRPO1 Trunk group 01 calling 088 TRKGRP02 Trunk group 02 calling 089 TRKGRPO3 Trunk group 03 calling 090 TRKGRP04 Trunk group 04 calling 091 TRKGRP05 Tru
108. If you select NO system returns to step 2 4 You are asked to confirm your selection 701 RESTART Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO ARE YOU SURE YES OR Press UP DOWN key to select and press RIGHT soft key If you select YES the card is restarted 5 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data None Related Items MMC 417 PRI CRC4 Option DCS amp Compact Il MMC 419 BRI Option MMC 420 PRI Option DCS amp Compact Il MMC 423 S T Mode MMC 418 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 419 BRIOPTION pcs c 7 cu 4 816 V 408i v 408 X This MMC comprises two groups of items One group is for the TRUNK ports as set in MMC 423 S T Mode and the other is for the STATION ports Be aware that some items will not be available on certain types of system Note For each BRI access two adjacent ports are assigned You need only change the value for one ofthe two ports the value for the other port will be changed automatically Ports Programmed as TRUNK in MMC 423 Display shows BRI TRK Items to select include some or all of the following BRI MODE CHANNEL ANY DLSEND and BRI CODING BRI MODE P P DDI When BRI line is point to point configuration and is a DDI line Incoming calls are placed as setin MMC 714 DDI Number amp Name Translation All incoming calls through the DDI trunk will be placed according t
109. LD Used to clear previous entry MMC 714 Page 1 of 3 DCS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL ACTION 1 Open programming and select 714 Display shows Enter valid entry number e g 005 or 05 via dial keypad OR Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor Enter the DDI number e g 4603831 via dial keypad and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor Max digits is 12 Enter day destination via dial keypad e g 204 OR Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor Enter night destination via dial keypad e g 204 OR Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor Enter 1 for YES call waiting or 0 for NO no call wait ing OR Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor Enter digits to be deleted via dial keypad e g 3 OR Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor Enter name using above table and press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC MMC 714 Page 2 of 3 MMC PROGRAMS NOVEMBER 2001 DISPLAY DID DIGIT 001 DGT 2xek DID DIGIT 005 DGT DID DIGIT 005 DGT 4603831 DID DIGIT 005 D 204 N B DID DIGIT 005 D 204 N 204 DID DIGIT 005 CW NO DELETE 0 DID DIGIT 005 CW NO DELETE 3 DID DIGIT 005 NAME _ DCS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MAN
110. MC 100 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 101 CHANGE USER PASSCODE Allows the system administrator to reset keyset passcodes to their default value of 1234 This MMC cannot display station passcodes it can only reset them to default The passcode is used to lock or unlock the keyset for toll restriction call barring override and to access the DISA feature Note Default passcodes cannot be used for toll restriction override DISA access or the walking class of service function PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 101 201 PASSCODE Display shows PASSCODE 2 Dial keyset number e g 205 205 PASSCODE OR PASSCODE Use UP or DOWN to scroll through keyset numbers and press RIGHT soft key to move the cursor right 3 Press HOLD to reset passcode 205 PASSCODE PASSCODE 1234 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data All station passcodes 1234 Related Items MMC 100 Station Lock MMC 101 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 102 CALL FORWARD Allows the system administrator to program the call forward destinations for statio
111. MMC Default Data NONE Related Items MMC 313 Assign PIN Code MMC 217 Compact I Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 219 COMMON RELAY SERVICE TYPE pcs a x cn V s16 V 408i V 408 V This MMC is used to define the function of e three common relays in the Compact II MISC card 363 365 or e the common relay the 816 base board 362 or e the common relay in the 408 408i base board 361 Each relay can be used for one ofthe following 0 EXTERNAL PAGE 1 COMMON BELL 2 LOUD BELL 3 NOT USE PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 219 363 RELAY TYPE Display shows e g 363 EXTERNAL PAGE 2 Compactll only dial relay number e g 364 364 RELAY TYPE OR EXTERNAL PAGE Use UP or DOWN to scroll through numbers and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 816 408 408i press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Dial relay function 0 3 see table above 364 RELAY TYPE OR LOUD BELL Press UP or DOWN to scroll through options and press RIGHT soft key 4 Compact 1 only Repeat step 2 for next relay 364 RELAY TYPE NOT USE 5 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data EXTERNAL PAGE Related Items MMC 203 Assign UA Devi
112. N DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 422 701 TRK COS Display shows first trunk DAY 01 NIGHT 01 2 Dial trunk number e g 705 705 TRK COS OR DAY 01 NIGHT 01 Use UP and DOWN to scroll through trunks and press RIGHT soft key OR OR s ALL TRK COS Press ANS RLS select all stations DAY NIGHT 3 Enter day class of service e g 05 205 TRK COS OR DAY 05 NIGHT 01 Use UP and DOWN to scroll through classes of service and press RIGHT soft key 4 Enter night class of service e g 05 205 TRK COS OR DAY 05 NIGHT 05 Use UP and DOWN to scroll through classes of service and press RIGHT sof key to return to step 2 5 Press TRSF to save and exit OR Press SPEAKER to save and advance to next MMC Default Data DAY CLASS 01 1 NIGHT CLASS 01 1 Related Items MMC 301 Assign Station COS MMC 410 Assign DISA Trunk MMC 701 Assign COS Contents MMC 422 Page 1of1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 423 S T MODE EM 7 V s16 V 408i V 408 Used to select the function of each BRI access You can set a BRI access as TRUNK to which an ISDN C O line is connected or as STATION to which an BDN terminal is connected For each BRI access two adjacent ports are assigned You need only change the value for one of the two ports the value for the other port will be changed automatically Note Any change made in this MMC will take effect only after restarting th
113. NONE 2 Enter the station number to copy to e g 205 205 COPY KEY OF FROM NONE Press UP or DOWN keys to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Enter station number to copy from e g 203 and cursor returns to step 2 FROM 203 OR Press UP or DOWN keys to make selection 4 Press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 OR Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data None Related Items MMC 107 Key Extender MMC 721 Save Station Key Programming MMC 722 Station Key Programming MMC 723 System Key Programming MMC 720 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 721 SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING Prevents the loss of programmable keys on keysets when testing or replacement is required First the data is saved and then the station can be replaced with another station type or the keys can be reprogrammed to other features Once testing or replacement is completed the data can be restored to the individual station providing the same keyset type is used Options are SAVE and RESTORE Note This program is not to be confused with MMC 315 Set Relocation MMC 721 is for saving and restor ing the same electronic device type at that port PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC ACTION
114. OL 0 HOST 0 V110 1 MODEM 1 V120 2 DTE 3 PRT TABLE 3 CALL MODE TABLE 9 SPEED TABLE 0 MANUAL 0 300 1 AUTO WITH 1 600 2 AUTO WITHOUT 2 1200 3 2400 4 4800 TABLE 4 ANS MODE 5 9600 0 MANUAL 12 AUTO 7 38400 8 48000 9 56000 0 OFF 1 ON TABLE 5 AUTO BAUD 0 oa N 1 2 3 0 OFF 1 ON TABLE 6 DTR CHECK 0 NONE 1 ODD 2 EVEN TABLE 7 ECHO 0 OFF 1 ON TABLE 12 STOP BIT 0 1 2 Default Data Related Items SIM Type DTE Call Mode Manual Ans Mode Manual Auto Baud ON DTR Check ON Echo 110 Speed 9600 Char Length 8 Bits Parity None Stop Bit 1 MMC 804 System I O Parameter MMC 311 DCS Page 2 of 2 MMC PROGRAMS NOVEMBER 2001 TABLE 10 CHAR LENGTH TABLE 11 PARITY TABLE DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 312 ALLOW CLIP Epes 7 c V cu 7 sm V 40s V 408 X Allows the system installer or administrator to allow or prevent receipt of CLIP data from the network request or restrict sending of CLIP data to the network Each station can have the following options SND YES request the network to send Caller ID when outgoing call is made NO request the network NOT to send Caller ID when outgoing call is made RCV YES allow display of CLIP data at keysets NO prevent display of CLIP data at keysets INFO If YES selected f
115. OLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 308 201 BGM SOURCE Display shows current setting BGM SOURCE NONE 2 Dial keyset number e g 205 205 BGM SOURCE OR BGM SOURCE NONE Use UP or DOWN to scroll through keyset numbers OR and press RIGHT soft key to move the cursor ALL BGM SOURCE OR Press ANS RLS to select all stations BGM SOURCE 3 Enter source number e g 3701 205 BGM SOURCE OR BGM SOURCE 3701 Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data NONE Related Items MMC 309 Assign Station Music On Hold MMC 408 Assign Trunk Music On Hold Source MMC 308 Page of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 309 ASSIGN STATION MUSIC ON HOLD Allows the system administrator to select which Music On Hold MOH source can be heard on each station There are four possible selections for each music source TONE NONE internal and external customer provided MOH source DCS The system must have a Trunk A card installed to provide a music source There is a total of 19 possible music selections but this is dependent on the number of Trunk A cards in the sys tem Only one external music source is provided per Trunk A card The default directory number of a music source is 3701 3719 Internal
116. OUNT CODE OR 005 Press UP DOWN key to selected index number and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Enter account code maximum 12 digits via dial keypad ACCOUNT CODE 005 123456789012 4 Press RIGHT soft key to move cursor back to step 2 to Enter another code OR Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data None Related Items MMC 305 Assign Forced Code MMC 708 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 709 PBX ACCESS CODE Provides a way of identifying the access codes needed to work toll restriction call barring when the system is used with either a PBX or CENTREX supplied dial tone PBX ACCESS CODE op tion Maximum number of entries allowed DCS CII 816 5 408 408i 2 Also provides a way of identifying the access codes needed to work toll restriction when operat ing special C O provided functions SPECIAL CODE option a maximum of 10 entries is al lowed PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 709 PBX ACCESS CODE Display shows 1 2 Enter 0 for PBX ACCESS CODE or 1 for SPECIAL PBX ACCESS CODE CODE 1 OR Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3
117. OUT 2 Dial port number e g 718 VM IN OUT OR 718 IN OUT Press UP or DOWN key to select Press RIGHT soft key 3 Press UP or DOWN key to select option VM IN OUT e g IN and press RIGHT soft key 718 IN 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data IN OUT Related Items Cadence programming SVMi 4 programming MMC 757 DCS Compact II Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 800 ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM Used to open and close system level technician programming If programming is not opened and an attempt is made to access a system MMC the error message ACCESS DENIED will be displayed A four digit passcode is required to access this MMC which can be changed in MMC 801 When opened this MMC enables access to all MMCs The procedure below describes how to open programming PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC ACTION 1 Press TRSF 800 ENABLE TECH PROG Display shows PASSCODE 2 Enter passcode ENABLE TECH PROG PASSCODE DCS only Correct code shows y N ENABLE TECH PROG OR DISABLE 1 Compact Il 816 and 408 408i Correct code ENABLE TECH PROG shows DISABLE Incorrect code shows you return to the passcode ENABLE TECH PROG entry dis
118. OWER FEED option to YES in MMC 419 Step 3 Restart the BRI card by executing MMC 418 Card Restart so that th e changes you made can take effect Step 4 Program MMC 424 So Mapping to map an ISDN number into a port You must also input the mapped number as MSN to the ISDN terminals connected to that BRI ac cess If you mapped 7807 into 707 you must set the MSN of the terminals con nected to 707 or 708 to 7807 Now if you dial 7807 from a keyphone DGP a SETUP message will be sent out through 707 or 708 with the called party number of 7807 There can be a number of terminals connected to 707 or 708 butonly terminals with MSN of 7807 will alert Alternatively if you dial 707 or 708 from a DGP SETUP message will be sent out through 707 or 708 without the called party number All terminals connected to 707 or 708 will alert BRI Access In MMCs 419 421 423 and 424 which are related to BRI cards you can see the port number displayed as 7 Each port stands for a B channel Thus two adjacent ports make up a BRI access You need only change the settings for one of the two ports for that BRI access For example you may see port 709 and 710 are displayed respectively in the MMCs but these ports are for the same BRI access If you change settings for 709 you also change settings for 710 and vice versa 3 20 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 Part 4 MMC Programs This part con
119. OWN 07 IN TOMORROW 08 RETURN AFTERNOON 09 ON VACATION 10 GONE HOME Messages 11 20 are blank Related Items MMC 115 Set Programmed Message MMC 715 Page 2 of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 716 UK LCR OPTION Before using this MMC run MMC 812 to make sure the correct country option UK has been selected MMC 716 provides UK LCR options 0 NETWORK CODE Provides secondary network access code when the call is routed to the secondary network 16 entries maximum each 10 digits maximum in length 1 PIN CODE Assigns PIN code used when the call is routed to secon dary 131 Cable amp Wireless network 2 CCC OPTION Selects Call Cost Option and is related only to 131 Cable amp Wireless service 3 STATION PIN NO Assigns individual users to selected PIN codes in the sys tem Note The second entry may be selected as a primary secondary network By default this is 132 Cable amp Wireless Digital Access If dialled digits are not matched to the entry in the LCR DIGIT TABLE MMC 710 and start with 0 the network code in the second entry will be dialled out by the system prior to transmitting dialled digits PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 716 NETWO
120. PCMMC and re turns the system to secure program status PERI UCD REPORT Controls the interval between periodic UCD reports being output to the appli cable port POWER DOWN Sets the duration of disconnect signal for VM AA ports RECALL DISCONNECT The time an attendant recall rings before being disconnected See ATT Re call Time MMC 501 Page 5 of 6 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 RECALL WAIT This is the time any recall hold or transfer continues to recall at your station before it recalls to the operator SMDR START DIAL PULSE ROTARY This grace period timer starts SMDR recording for rotary dialling This timer also controls the LCD duration timer on the keysets The duration time displayed and the SMDR time duration will be the same SMDR START DTMF This grace period timer starts SMDR recording for touchtone dialling This timer also controls the LCD duration timer on the keysets The duration time displayed and the SMDR time duration will be the same SYS HOLD RECALL Determines the time calls can be left on hold before recalling the holding sta tion Setting timer to 000 means no recalling will take place TRANSFER RECALL Determines the time that transferred calls ring before recalling See Recall Wait Time UCDS AUDIO ALARM Determines how long the longest waiting call can be held before the system gives an audio alarm to the UCD supervisor UCDS VISUAL ALARM Determines how long the
121. PIN CODE OR 2 Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Enterthe desired access code via dial keypad e g PIN CODE 3040506 2 3040506 Press RIGHT soft key to enter and return to step 2 and enter another number 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data None Related Items MMC 210 Customer On Off MMC 313 Assign PIN Code MMC 716 Network Code MMC 717 Compact I Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 718 MY AREA CODE Not Used in the UK MMC 718 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 720 COPY KEY PROGRAMMING For duplicating key assignments from one keyset to another This can be done on a per station basis or on all stations but not on a group of stations A limitation is that the original and target keysets must be of the same type e g both 24B keysets or both 12B keysets A further condition is that a Euro keyset can only be copied to another Euro keyset and a type only to an other non Euro type PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 720 201 COPY KEY Display shows FROM
122. Press UP or DOWN key to make selection Press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Enter user number 1 7 1 5 dependent on number of 356 VDIALER USER users allowed via MMC 215 e g 5 USER 5 NONE OR Press UP or DOWN key to make selection Press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 4 Enter station number e g 205 via dial keypad 356 VDIALER USER OR USER 5 205 Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to return to step 3 to continue with en tries 5 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data NONE Related Items MMC 215 Voice Dialler Options MMC 722 Station Key Programming MMC 723 System Key Programming MMC 724 Dial Numbering Plan Keyset User Guide MMC 216 DCS Compact II Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 217 pcs X c 7 cu x s16 X 408 408 X Used to select Call Cost Option and is related only to 131 Cable amp Wireless service PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 217 CCC OPTION Display shows OPTION NONE 2 Use UP or DOWN to scroll through options CCC OPTION OPTION STATION 3 Press TRANSFER to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next
123. R MISC installed cards e g Misc card 96 10 02 V3 0 3 Press TRSF to exit OR Press SPEAKER to advance to next MMC Note If a particular card is not installed the LCD shows either NO card type CARD or NO INSTALL CARD If there is no version data you see NO VERSION DATA Default Data Installed card version and date Related Items None MMC 727 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 728 CLIP TRANSLATION TABLE bes c v cm v 816 408i V 408 Allows the system administrator or technician to associate a CLIP number received from the cen tral office with a name programmed in this translation table If there is no match between a ceived number and a name in this table no CLIP name is displayed DCS translation table consists of 250 entries each comprising 11 digit telephone number and a 16 digit name Compact Il and 816 translation table consists of 200 entries each comprising a 16 digit tele phone number and a 16 digit name 408i translation table consists of 100 entries each comprising a 14 digit telephone number and a 16 digit name Names are written using the keypad Each key press selects a character and moves the cursor to the next position For example if the name is SAM SMITH press the number 7 four times to get the letter S Now press the number 2 once to get the letter A Continue selecting char
124. R to exit and advance to next MMC Default Data Page Header Yes DND Call Yes Line Per Page 66 Wake Up Call Yes Incoming Call Yes Directory Name None Outgoing Call Yes Caller ID Data Yes Authorise Code Yes Abandon Call Yes SMDR Start Time Yes No of Dial Mask 00 In Out Group Yes DID Num Name Yes Related Items MMC 300 Customer On Off Per Station MMC 725 Page 3 of 3 DCS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL MMC 726 MMC PROGRAMS NOVEMBER 2001 VM AA OPTIONS Provides a flexible means of setting in band signalling for voice mail or auto attendant parame ters There are eight main options for programming and several sub options to customise the application Simple YES NO numeric and alpha characters are required for setting VM AA The following options may be selected for VM AA operation 0 EXT FOR DN1 1 TRK FOR DN1 2 EXT FOR DN2 3 TRK FOR DN2 4 SEPARATOR 5 DISCONNECT SIGNAL 6 CALL TYPE ID 0 DIRECT CALL ALL FWD CALL BSY FWD CALL NOA FWD CALL RECALL DIR TRK CALL OVERFLOW DID CALL MESSAGE CALL 7 PROGRESS TONE ID DTMF information for the station that called the VM AA port station which is forwarded to VM AA port DTMF information for the trunk that called the VM AA port DTMF information for the station that originated the call to a station which is forwarded to a VM AA port DTMF information for the trunk that called a station for warded to a VM AA port In cases wh
125. RAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 302 PICKUP GROUPS Allows the assignment of stations into call pickup groups Maximum number of pickup groups is DCS and Compactll 20 816 8 408 408i 4 An unlimited number of members can belong to each group Stations can only be in one pickup group at any given time PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 302 201 PICKUP GRP Display shows PICKUP GRP 01 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 PICKUP GRP OR PICKUP GRP 01 Use UP or DOWN to select station number and press RIGHT soft key OR OR ALL PICKUP GRP Press ANS RLS key to select all PICKUP GRP 3 Dial pickup group number e g 04 205 PICKUP GRP OR PICKUP GRP 04 Press UP or DOWN to select group number 4 Press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 to enter more stations OR Press LEFT soft key to return to step 3 OR Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data All stations group 01 Related Items MMC 107 Key Extender MMC 722 Station Key Programming MMC 723 System Key Programming MMC 302 Page 1 of 1 DCS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL MMC 303 MMC PROGRAMS NOVEMBER 2001 ASSIGN BOSS
126. RECTPICKUP MMC 723 Page 2 of 3 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 816 408 408i DROP TRANSFERCALDRO Ds DIRECT STATION SELECT 7 v7 v FD DIRECT TRUNK SELECT 7 lt lt lt S INQRE CLIPINQURE O Oo CLIP SPY NEW CALL CLIP NAME NUMBER DATE OPER OPERATOR PARK CALLPARK RETRIEVE 7 PAUSE SSSSSSSSSSSASSSSSSSSSS RES PAUSE OHVA REJ ECT SNR SAVEDNUMBERREDAL 7 5P SUPERMSOROFUCD 7 se sPEDDAL 2777 7 77 see SPEAKERS y Y aa STORE sTORE CUP Y X 7 G M SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS We e lt lt lt lt VDIAL VOICE DIALLER ACCESS VOICE MAIL GROUP VMADM VOICE MAIL ADMINISTRATION VMAME VOICE MAIL ANSWERING MACHINE EMULATION Related Items MMC 107 Key Extender MMC 723 Page 3 of 3 gt lt gt lt gt lt N N DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN The system comes with a range of acceptable numbering plans set as default This MMC allows the system installer to customise feature codes and dialling plans An error message is also pro vided in case an access feature code is duplicated The following options can be selected N A not applicable Description Da DCS CII 816 408
127. RK CODE Display shows 01 2 Dial item number e g 1 OR 1 Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key 3 Enter index number 0 3 PIN CODE OR Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key OR Press LEFT soft key to return to step 2 3 4 Enterthe desired access via dial keypad and press PIN CODE RIGHT soft key to enter and return to step 3 3 5 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC MMC 716 Page 1 of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 Default Data NETWORK CODE None PIN CODE None CCC OPTION None STATION NO All stations are 1 Related Items MMC 710 LCR Digit Table MMC 711 LCR Time Table MMC 712 LCR Route Table MMC 713 LCR Modify Digit Table MMC 812 Select Country MMC 716 Page 2 of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 717 PIN CODE bes X c v 1 cm x s16 x 408 x 408 Used to assign the PIN code used when a call is routed to the secondary 131 Cable amp Wireless network PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 717 PIN CODE Display shows 1 2 Enter index number e g 2
128. ROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 304 ASSIGN STATION TRUNK USE Allows trunks on a per station basis to answer incoming calls to dial out or to do both If a sta tion is set to DIAL NO the station will not have the ability to place a call If the station is set to ANS NO the station cannot answer an incoming call Note MMC 406 Trunk Ring Assignment overrides this MMC forthe Answer option PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 304 201 USE 701 Display shows DIAL YES ANS YES 2 Dialthe station number e g 205 205 USE 701 OR DIAL YES ANS YES Press UP or DOWN key to select station and press RIGHT soft key 3 Dial the trunk ID number e g 704 205 USE 704 OR DIAL YES ANS YES Press UP or DOWN key to select trunk and press RIGHT soft key 4 Press UP or DOWN key to select YES NO option 205 USE 704 OR DIAL NO ANS YES Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor to ANS option Press UP or DOWN key to select YES NO Option OR Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 205 USE 704 DIAL NO ANS NO 5 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC
129. SF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to save and advance to next MMC Default Data NAME FIRST Related Items MMC 728 CLIP Translation Table MMC 119 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 121 KEYSET LANGUAGE Des c x cu V 816 V 408i v 408 Used to assign an LCD display based on a keyset user s own language Options include some or all of the following depending on your system ENGLISH GERMAN PORTUGAL NORSK NORWAY DANISH DUTCH ITALY SPANISH PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 121 201 LANGUAGE Display shows ENGLISH 2 Dial keyset number e g 205 205 LANGUAGE OR ENGLISH Press UP or DOWN to select keyset and press RIGHT A key ALL LANGUAGE Press ANS RLS to select All 3 Press UP or DOWN to select language and press 205 LANGUAGE RIGHT soft key GERMAN 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data ENGLISH Related Items Multi Language MMC 121 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 200 OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING Used to open enable or close disable customer level programmi
130. SS Display shows 100 STN LOCK YES DCS only CUSTOMER ACCESS Enter desired tenant number 1 2 100 STN LOCK YES OR Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 2 Enter desired MMC number e g 102 CUSTOMER ACCESS OR 102 CALL FWD YES Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO CUSTOMER ACCESS OR 102 CALL FWD NO Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press LEFT soft key to return to step 3 to make additional en tries 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data Customers have access to the following default YES 100 119 201 202 209 211 14 216 300 306 308 309 312 315 317 404 406 408 410 412 414 416 421 500 502 505 507 508 600 602 604 606 607 705 708 714 715 720 722 725 727 728 Related Items None MMC 802 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 803 ASSIGN TENANT GROUP bes X x 816 X 408i x 408 Allows the assignment of DCS tenant groups on a per cabinet slot and port basis The simple rule is Cabinet Slot Port Tenant The simplicity of this program allows for flexible assignments The only information needed is the correct correlation of entries PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections
131. TIME TONE CADENCE ASSIGN AUTO NIGHT TIME Eg Y orion orum lt Y UNIT COST PER MP 200 PENCE CALL COST RATE 100 2 6 DCS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP 602 STATION GROUP NAME 603 ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP 604 ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE 605 ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK UCDOPTIONS ASSIGN CLIP REVIEW BLOCK COPY COS CONTENTS ASSIGN COS CONTENTS 607 608 00 E e Y 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE Y 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE 711 LCR TIME TABLE 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE 714 DDINUMBER AND NAME TRANSLA TION PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE 721 SAVE STATION KEY PRO GRAMMING 702 TOLL DENY TABLE mr Bid 2 7 En DEFAULT DATA NOVEMBER 2001 SYSTEM SEE MMC 606 STATIONS ONE BIN OF 10 ENTRIES TOLL LEVEL ALL CO S A ALL FEATURES EXCL OVERRIDE YES N NONE SION DEPENDS S W VER SION SEE MMC 714 20 MESSAGES 10 PRE PROGRAMMED SEE MMC 715 Y SEE MMC 716 NONE Paes Les pe NOT USED IN UK RESTORE Dv pv pseemem v pv see nes C pem Y DCS DEFAULT DATA COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001
132. UAL Default Data 001 002 DIGITS 2 3K DAY DEST B B NIGHT DEST B B CALL WAIT NO NO DELETE 0 0 NAME NONE NONE For 816 systems default DIGITS are 01 02 2 5 Other defaults apply For 408i systems default DIGITS are 01 02 2 5 Other defaults apply Related Items MMC 419 BRI Option MMC 420 PRI Option MMC 421 MSN Digit MMC 714 Page 3 of 3 003 53ek NO NONE 03 Tek 03 Tek MMC PROGRAMS NOVEMBER 2001 004 TREK NO NONE DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 715 PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE Allows a custom message up to 16 characters to be programmed There are 20 messages al lowed in total 01 20 Messages 01 10 are pre set see default data but can be changed by de leting and or typing in new text Messages 11 20 are blank by default EMPTY MESSAGE may be displayed if one of these is selected or the display is blank Messages are written via the keypad Each press of a key selects a character Pressing a differ ent key moves the cursor to the next position For example if the message is In the Showroom press key number 4 three times to get the letter I Then press key number 6 twice to get the to move the cursor right Continue selecting characters from the keypad to complete your message Press the programmable A key to toggle between upper and lower case text Tip When the character you want is on the s
133. USE 201 Display shows DIAL YES 2 Dial the first station number e g 205 205 USE 201 OR DIAL YES Press UP or DOWN key to select station and press RIGHT soft key OR Press ANS RLS to select all stations 3 Dialthe second station number e g 204 205 USE 204 OR DIAL YES Press UP or DOWN key to select station and press RIGHT soft key 4 Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO 205 USE 204 OR DIAL NO Press UP or DOWN key to select YES NO and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 5 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data DIAL YES Related Items MMC 316 Copy Station Usable MMC 317 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 318 DISTINCTIVE RING pes x cu V 816 V 408i v 408 Sets a distinctive ring for stations You can set both tone T and cadence C to one of eight ring values 1 8 or to follow the station ring F STN PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 318 201 DIST RING Display shows T F STN C F STN 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 DIST RING OR T F STN C F STN Press UP or DOWN to select station and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Press UP or DOWN to select T value e g
134. VEMBER 2001 MMC 812 SELECT COUNTRY pcs Y Tx en 7 sis 7 aos 4 408 v IMPORTANT This MMC should be run before any other programming is done to ensure that the correct software for your country has been selected or to change the selection if required When using this MMC the system is restarted to make the selection effective Note You do not need to enable system programming MMC 800 in order to run this program but you will still require the technician s passcode PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 812 SELECT COUNTRY Display shows the country selected by the installer UK e g UK To accept this setting go to step 4 2 Press UP or DOWN key to select a different country SELECT COUNTRY and press RIGHT soft key DENMARK 3 Press UP or DOWN key to select YES or NO and press DEFAULTING SYSTM RIGHT soft key ARE YOU SURE YES Warning if you select YES this will clear the memory and restart the system 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data NONE Related Items All MMCs MMC 812 Page 1 of 1 Samsung Telecoms U K Limited Brookside Business Park Greengate Middleton Manchester M24 1GS Tel 0161 655 1100 Fax 0161 655 1166 TELECOMS
135. WN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 807 VOL CONTROL DGP Display shows KEY TONE VOL 1 2 Press RIGHT soft key to move cursor VOL CONTROL DGP KEY TONE VOL 1 3 Press UP or DOWN key to select feature e g SIDE VOL CONTROL DGP TONE VOL and press RIGHT soft key SIDE TONE VOL 1 4 Press UP or DOWN key to select volume and press VOL CONTROL DGP LEFT soft key SIDE TONE VOL 2 5 Repeatstep 3 to select and change other volume levels OR Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data Key tone vol 1 Noise thres 1 Sidetone vol 1 Alc thres 7 Handset tx 3 thres 3 Mic tx level 3 comp 5 Noise guard 8 Related Items None MMC 807 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 808 T1 TRUNK CODING Not Used in the UK MMC 808 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 809 SYSTEM MMC LANGUAGE pcs cm v s16 7 408i 408 V Allows the assignment of an LCD display based on the system programming language Your system supports some or all of the following languages ENGLISH DANISH GERMAN DUTCH PORTUGAL SPANISH PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options K
136. WN to select message and press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 OR Select 00 to cancel a previously set message 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data No messages selected Related Items MMC 715 Programmed Station Message MMC 722 Station Key Programming MMC 723 System Key Programming MMC 115 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 116 ALARM AND MESSAGE Allows the system administrator or technician to set or change the alarm clock appointment minder feature for individual or all stations For DCS systems three alarms 1 3 can be set for each station For other systems two alarms 1 2 can be set Each alarm may be defined as a one time or TODAY alarm as a DAILY alarm or NOTSET as described below The TODAY alarm is automatically cancelled after it rings while the DAILY alarm rings every day at the same time It is also possible to set a message to display when the alarm is sounded Dial Alarm Type 0 NOTSET 1 TODAY 2 DAILY Messages are written using the keypad Each key press selects a character and moves the cur sor to the next position For example if the message is MEETING press the number 6 once to get the letter M Now press the number 3 twice to get the letter E Continue selecting characters from the keypad to complete your message Press the programmable A key to tog gle between upper and lower case
137. Wireless 131 service there is a maximum of four PIN codes allocated in the system so users must be assigned to the PIN code used when dialling out on a Cable amp Wireless Network This MMC is related only to 131 Cable amp Wireless service ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 313 201 PIN CODE Display shows PIN CODE NONE 2 Dial the station number e g 205 205 PIN CODE OR PIN CODE NONE Press UP or DOWN key to select station and press RIGHT soft key to advance to step 3 3 Enter the pin code serial number 1 2 3 or 4 e g 1 205 PIN CODE CODE 1 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data All stations are code 1 Related Items MMC 217 CCC Option MMC 716 UK LCR Option MMC 717 Pin Code MMC 313 Compact I Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 314 CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL NUM NEN eee Allows outgoing call restriction disconnect or confirm with tone PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL FEATURE KEYS 0 NONE 1 CONFIRM TONE 2 DISCONNECT ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 314 201 CO CONFIRM Display shows NONE 2 Dial station number e g
138. YS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 412 701 TRK SIGNAL Display shows IMMEDIATE START 2 Enter desired trunk number e g 705 705 TRK SIGNAL OR IMMEDIATE START Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor OR Press ANS RLS to select all trunks 3 Enter desired trunk type selection from above list 705 TRK SIGNAL OR WINK START Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data All AC15 trunks set to IMMEDIATE START Related Items MMC 714 DDI Number and Name Translation MMC 412 DCS Compact II Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 414 MPD PRS SIGNAL pes c 7 cu V 816 V 408 X 408 Used on a per trunk basis to define if a C O line is to be either a Metering Pulse MPD or a Po larity Reversal Signal PRS trunk Note PRS is not available in the UK A Meter Pulse Trunk will detect a C O provided meter pulse A Polarity Reversal trunk will detect the line reversal signal which may be provided by the C O when the other party answers the out going call or the outside party clears the call If the trunk
139. a is displayed at us ers stations after the CLIP key is pressed e MMC 415 Used to determine which trunks will record data in the REPORT TRUNK ABANDON Call Abandon list and print with an Abandon A flag DATA on the SMDR report e MMC 608 Used to assign CLIP Review blocks to keysets to al ASSIGN CLIP REVIEW BLOCK low the user to review CLIP data for previous calls e MMC 701 All CLIP features are included this MMC so that the ASSIGN COS CONTENTS system installer can allow or deny them e MMC 724 CLIP features are included in this MMC to allow the DIAL NUMBERING PLAN system installer to assign an access code where nec essary DCS SPECIAL APPLICATIONS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 Toll Restriction Call Barring Overview The system allows each station to be assigned a class of service COS for day and night modes Into this COS is brought the dialling restrictions to be applied to each station Dial ling restrictions are applied in MMC 702 Toll Deny Table and MMC 703 Toll Allowance Table Eight levels of restriction are available to stations A B C D E F G and H Level A im poses no restrictions on station dialling level H restricts stations to internal calls only and levels B to G are programmable In addition the Wild Card Table MMC 704 can be used to provide more flexibility when programming Toll Restriction Rules e The Deny Table entries prevent certain numbers being
140. a similar COS to that being copied but want to change a few selected op tions within that COS This MMC allows you to enter MMC 701 Assign COS Contents in order to make any changes you require If you wantto create a completely new COS use MMC 701 PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC Key 24 24 keyset key 12 12B keyset 6 6 keyset is used to advance to MMC 701 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 700 COPY COS ITEMS Display shows COS 015 COS 01 2 Dialselected COS to copy e g 05 COPY COS ITEMS OR COS 055 COS 01 Press UP or DOWN key to select COS and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor and advance to next step 3 Dialtarget COS e g 06 COPY COS ITEMS OR COS 05 5COS 06 Press UP or DOWN key to select COS and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor back to step 2 4 To make changes to COS options press F key COS CONTENTS 06 to advance to MMC 701 Assign COS Contents TOLL LEVEL A OR Go to step 5 if no changes are required 5 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data None Related Items MMC 701 Assign COS Contents MMC 700 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS MMC 701 is used to create a new class of s
141. ac ters from the keypad to complete your name Press the programmable A key to toggle between upper and lower case text Tip When the character you want is on the same key as the previous character you typed in press the UP key to move the cursorto the right then selectthe character The key can be used for the following special characters in sequence of key presses PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry wi Key 19 24B keyset or key 7 12B keyset or key 1 6B keyset toggles upper and lower case text MMC 728 Page 1 of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 728 CLIP XLAT 001 Display shows first entry DGT 2 Dial entry number e g 005 CLIP XLAT 005 OR DGT _ Press UP or DOWN key to select and press RIGHT soft key 3 Enter telephone number and press RIGHT soft key CLIP XLAT 005 to advance to name entry DGT 3054264100 OR Enter telephone number and press LEFT soft key to return to step 2 4 Enter associated name as described above and CLIP XLAT 005 press RIGHT or LEFT soft key to return to step 2 SAMSUNG TELECOMS OR Press SPEAKER to save and advance to next MMC OR Press TRSF to save and exit programming Default Data None Related Items Non
142. aking a call from a terminal attached to LT S port to a DCS subscriber DGP SLT To call a DCS subscriber from an ISDN terminal dial the number you wantto call It is of no concern to the BRI card whether the terminal sends the number in enblock or overlap mode Making a call from a terminal attached to LT S port to a remote terminal through a TRK Dial the TRK number followed by the destination number ISDN TRK and analogue TRK op erate in the same way as seen from a terminal When calling through an ISDN TRK there 3 13 DCS SPECIAL APPLICATIONS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 is no relationship or restriction between the dial sending mode of the terminal and the ISDN TRK DATA calls mustuse an ISDN TRK Routing an incoming call to the terminals attached to LT S port Incoming calls are routed according to the properties of the selected TRK Routing is con trolled by the MMC tables You can put a terminal number into the DDI MSN or TRUNK RING table as a destination with or without a wild card digit You can then answer the in coming call from the terminal Features Reference Tables Tables 7 and 8 explain briefly which system features are applicable to ISDN cards Related Timers Implemented You can check the version of BRI or PRI 0 Disconnect NO trunk Dial Pass Time NO Only for analogue trunk DISA Disconnect NO
143. allowing a headset user to answer all calls by pressing the ANS RLS key HOT KEYPAD When ON this feature allows the user to dial numbers on the keypad without having to first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key KEY TONE Allows the user to hear a slight tone when pressing keys on the key set PAGE RE OIN Allows the user to hear the latter part of page announcements if the keyset becomes free during a page RING PREFER When OFF requires the user to press the fast flashing button to an swer a ringing call after lifting the handset CALL COST If enabled ON LCD shows real time call cost based on Metering Pulses arrived See AUTO TIMER option AME BGM Determines whether a station using Answering Machine Emulation will hear their personal greeting or background music BGM while callers are listening to the personal greeting A BGM source must be selected for this to work Cadence and SVMi 4 voice mail systems only AME PSWD Sets the Answering Machine Emulation password ON or OFF Ca dence and SVMi 4 voice mail systems only NOT CONT CID When ON the keyset displays the call timer for the duration of an in coming trunk call if AUTO TIMER is ON When OFF the CLIP num ber for a call is displayed for the duration of the call Not applicable to 408 systems Note Keyset users can set or change these options for their own keyset refer to the Samsung DCS Keyset User Guide for details PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN
144. ame key as the previous character you typed in press the UP key to move the cursorto the right then selectthe character The key can be used for the following special characters in sequence of key presses PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry A Key 19 24B keysets or key 7 12B keysets or key 1 6B key sets toggles upper case and lower case text ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 715 PGM MESSAGE 01 Display shows IN A MEETING 2 Enter index number e g 11 PGM MESSAGE 11 OR EMPTY MESSAGE Press UP or DOWN arrow to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor MMC 715 Page 1 of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 3 If EMPTY MESSAGE is displayed you can press PGM MESSAGE 11 HOLD to delete this text However this Is optional as In the Showroom any new message you type will simply overwrite the displayed text Enter new message via the dial keypad using the above table maximum 16 characters 4 Press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 OR Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data 10 programmed messages these can be changed 01 IN A MEETING 02 OUTONACALL 03 OUT TO LUNCH 04 LEAVE A MESSAGE 05 PAGE ME 06 OUT OF T
145. and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 109 201 DAY FORMAT Display shows COUNTRY WESTERN 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 DAY FORMAT OR COUNTRY WESTERN Press UP or DOWN to select station and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor OR ALL DAY FORMAT Press ANS RLS for all keysets COUNTRY 3 Dial 0 2 to select option e g Country 205 DAY FORMAT OR COUNTRY WESTERN Press UP or DOWN to scroll through modes and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 4 Dial 0 or 1 to select option format e g Oriental 205 DAY FORMAT OR COUNTRY ORIENTAL Press UP or DOWN to select format and press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 5 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data Country Western Clock 24 hour Display Lowercase Related Items MMC 505 Assign Date and Time MMC 109 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 110 STATION ON OFF Allows the system administrator to set any of the following keyset features AUTO HOLD Automatically places an existing call on hold if a CALL key trunk key or trunk route key is pressed during that call AUTO TIMER Automatically starts the stopwatch timer during a C O call CALL COST option below should be OFF for this feature to work HEADSET USE When ON this feature disables the hookswitch
146. ard port numbers differ between systems see Part 2 section 2 3 System Configuration Quick Reference PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 731 381 RAM CLEAR Display shows e g for Compact II 816 CLR RECORDED NO 2 Dial AA number e g 381 381 RAM CLEAR OR CLR RECORDED NO Press UP or DOWN to make selection and press RIGHT soft key 3 Dial 0 No or 1 Yes 381 RAM CLEAR OR CLR RECORDED YES Press UP or DOWN to make selection and press RIGHT soft key 4 Dial 0 No or 1 Yes to confirm selection 381 RAM CLEAR OR ARE YOU SURE YES Press UP or DOWN to make selection and press RIGHT soft key 5 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data None Related Items None MMC 731 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 732 AA TRANSLATION TABLE Des 7 a x cm v s16 4 408 x 408 This command gives more flexibility to the system by compiling a digit to Plan or Destination Translation Table which performs the translation from dialled digit s into destination parts Des tination parts can be a station number station group REPEAT Change Greeting Message Code or AA Plan Table If yo
147. button to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER button to store and advance to next MMC Default Data NONE Related Items None MMC 740 Page of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 741 BSI CARD RESTART bes c j cm V 816 X 408i X 408 Used to restart a BSI card or DBS The DBS BSI card will be restarted automatically PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 741 BSI SLOT 2 DBS 1 Display shows RESTART NO 2 Select the specific BSI slot number or press the RIGHT BSI SLOT 2 DBS 1 soft key and select the specific DBS using the keypad NO or the UP DOWN keys If you want to restart all DBSs you must select A instead of a DBS number by pressing the ANS RLS key Press the RIGHT soft key 3 Press UP or DOWN to select Yes or No and press BSISLOT 2 DBS 1 RIGHT soft key RESTART YES 4 Confirm whether you want to restart by selecting YES BSISLOT 2 DBS 1 or NO using the UP or DOWN key and press RIGHT ARE YOU SURE YES soft key 5 Press TRSF button to exit OR Press SPEAKER button to advance to next MMC Default Data None Related Items MMC 737 DECT System Code MMC 738 DECT Clear Registration MMC 739 BSI Download MMC 742 BSI S
148. calling Station group 08 calling Station group 09 calling Station group 10 calling Station group 11 calling Station group 12 calling Station group 13 calling Station group 14 calling Station group 15 calling Station group 16 calling Station group 17 calling Station group 18 calling Station group 19 calling Station group 20 calling Not used System speed dial Not used Trunk group 01 calling Trunk group 02 calling MMC 701 Page 4 of 7 MMC PROGRAMS NOVEMBER 2001 DCS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL 089 TRKGRP03 090 TRKGRP04 091 TRKGRP05 092 TRKGRP 06 093 TRKGRPO7 094 TRKGRP 08 095 TRKGRP 09 096 TRKGRP 10 097 TRKGRP11 098 UNCO CNF 099 VM AREC 100 VM AME 101 VM REC 102 VM 5 01 103 VM STNO2 104 VM STN03 105 VM STN04 106 VM 5 05 107 VM 5 06 108 VM 5 07 109 VM 5 08 110 111 112 ABSENCE MMC PROGRAMS NOVEMBER 2001 Trunk group 03 calling Trunk group 04 calling Trunk group 05 calling Trunk group 06 calling Trunk group 07 calling Trunk group 08 calling Trunk group 09 calling Trunk group 10 calling Trunk group 11 calling CO to CO conference Voice mail automatic call record Voice mail answering machine emulation Voice mail manual call record Voice mail station 01 Voice mail station 02 Voice mail station 03 Voice mail station 04 Voice mail station 05 Voice mail station 06 Voice mail station 07 Voice mail station 08 Not used Absence 3 816 COS FEATURE LIST BY OPTION NUMBER
149. carrier as required CARS 0123456789 SELS 3101111111 3 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data 1111111111 Related Items MMC 202 Change Feature Passcodes MMC 737 DECT System Code MMC 738 DECT Clear Registration MMC 739 BSI Download MMC 741 BSI Card Restart MMC 742 BSI Status MMC 743 DBS Status MMC 744 BSI Registration On Off MMC 745 DCS Compact II Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 750 VM CARD RESTART Cadence amp SVMi 4 pcs 816 X 408 x 408 X Determines whether mailboxes are set up according to the data set in MMC 751 Assign Mailbox when the Cadence S VMi 4 card is restarted There are two options available in this MMC DOWNLOAD When the card starts part of the power up procedure will download data from the system to de termine time date what mailboxes to create and the system numbering plan This must be done at least once but when done this download fea ture can be turned off to save boot up time CARD RESTART If this option is set to YES the card will immediately restart according to the Download option specified above PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll thro ugh options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open pro
150. ce MMC 204 Common Bell Control MMC 205 Assign Loud Bell MMC 605 Assign External Page Zone MMC 219 Compact II 816 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 220 ISDN SERVICE TYPE pcs V a V V s16 V 408i V 408 X Assigns the ISDN service type for SLT stations Services consist of BC Bearer Capability and HLC High Layer Capability TYPE DESCRIPTION BC HLC 0 VOICE Voice service Speech Telephony 1 FAX 3 G3 FAX service 3 1kHz Audio FAX G2 G3 2 AUDIO 3 1 3 1kHz Audio service 3 1kHz Audio None 3 MODEM MODEM service 3 1kHz Audio Telephony PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 220 213 ISDN SRV Display shows VOICE 2 Dial station number SLT only e g 215 215 ISDN SRV OR VOICE Press UP or DOWN to select station and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Select service type 0 3 e g 2 215 ISDN SRV OR AUDIO 3 1 Press UP or DOWN to select option and press RIGHT soft key 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data VOICE Related Items None MMC 220 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 300 CUSTOMER ON OFF PER STATION
151. changed in MMC 724 1 3 Programming Levels There are three levels of programming System level Customer level and Station level System and Customer levels allow system wide programming and are under passcode protection to restrict access System programming is done by the system installer or system technician usually on a oneoff basis but also to manage any changes in the customer s requirements Customer programming is done by the system administrator on a day to day basis to manage station users requirements Station level program ming does not require a passcode allowing station users to make simple changes to their keyset features To prevent conflicting data from being entered only one person at a time can enter Sys tem or Customer programming If you attempt to enter programming mode while an other keyset is being used for programming your display shows xxx PGM MODE where is the keyset extension number of the station in programming mode While programming is in progress normal system operation is not affected 1 3 1 System Level This level is entered via MMC 800 and requires the installer s technician s passcode This is the highest level and allows access to all system programs station programs and maintenance programs The installer sometimes called the installing technician also decides which programs are accessible to the customer the system administrator at Customer level All MMCs are access
152. ct Il system nine an 816 system and four in a 408 408i system With this MMC you can select the desired levels Caution You should only change TSW gain control values under the supervision of Technical Sup port PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 805 TX LEVEL CONTROL Display shows LEVEL gt 1 2 Press UP or DOWN key to select TX LEVEL CON TX LEVEL CONTROL TROL or TSW GAIN CONTROL LEVELOS 1 OR Press RIGHT soft key to select If you selected TX goto step 3 If you selected TSW goto step 4 3 Press RIGHT soft key to go to the volume level TX LEVEL CONTROL OR LEVEL1 gt 2 Press UP or DOWN key to go to next volume level Enter desired volume level via dial keypad TX LEVEL CONTROL OR LEVEL 15 3 Use UP or DOWN key to scroll data 00 10 Go to step 6 if finished 4 Press RIGHT soft key to go to the TSW GAIN CON TSW GAIN CONTROL TROL type SLT SLT 0 0 OR Press UP or DOWN key to go to next TSW type MMC 805 Page 1 of 2 DCS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL 5 Press UP or DOWN key to select TSW gain data Press RIGHT soft key to go back to step 4 or go to step 6 if finished 6 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to n
153. current or old passcode is required for this MMC PROGRAM KEYS KEYPAD Used to enter passcodes SPEAKER Save data and advance to next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 801 TECH PASSCODE NEW CODE _ 2 Enter new passcode TECH PASSCODE NEW 3 Enter new passcode again to verify TECH PASSCODE VERIFY 4 If verification is correct press RIGHT soft key to con TECH PASSCODE tinue and enter desired MMC VERIFY SUCCESS If verification is incorrect display shows Failure TECH PASSCODE and system returns to step 2 VERIFY FAILURE 5 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to advance to MMC Default Data Default passcode 4321 Related Items MMC 800 Enable Technician Program MMC 801 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 802 CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER Allows the installer to designate which MMCs the system administrator customer has access to For example it is advised that the customer has access to MMC 102 Call Forward for call for warding but it is not advised that the customer has access to MMC 710 LCR Digit Table for LCR dial plans MMC 802 is for both tenants on DCS systems PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 802 CUSTOMER ACCE
154. cursorto the right then selectthe character The key be used for the following special characters in sequence of key presses PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options move cursor left or right KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry A Key 19 24B keyset or key 7 12B keyset or key 1 6B keyset toggles upper case and lower case text ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 404 701 TRUNK NAME Display shows 2 Dialtrunk e g 704 704 TRUNK NAME OR Press UP or DOWN to select trunk and press the RIGHT soft key to move the cursor 3 Entertrunk name using the procedure described 704 TRUNK NAME above TELECOMS Press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data No names entered Related Items MMC 104 Station Name MMC 405 Trunk Number MMC 404 Page 1 of 1 DCS COMBI 405 NED PROGRAMMING MANUAL MMC PROGRAMS NOVEMBER 2001 TRUNK NUMBER Allows a number up to 11 digits to be entered to identify an individual trunk Numbers are entered using the keypad Pressing a key selects a digit and moves the cursor to the next position The key can be used for the following special characters in sequence of key presses PROGRAM KEYS UP amp
155. d select 502 201 NO ANS FWD Display shows 015 SEC gt _ 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 NO ANS FWD OR 015 SEC gt _ Press UP or DOWN key to select station and press RIGHT soft key OR OR Press ANS RLS to select all stations and press RIGHT EC ENS EN soft key 3 Enter value must be three digits via dial keypad 205 NO ANS FWD e g 020 015 SEC 2020 System will return to step 2 4 Dialtimer number from above list e g 1 205 DTMF DUR OR 0100 MS gt _ Press UP or DOWN key to select and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 5 Enter new timer value must be four digits e g 0200 205 DTMF DUR System returns back to step 2 0100 MS 0200 6 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC MMC 502 Page of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 Default Data NO ANS FWD 015 sec DTMF DURATION 100 msec FIRST DGT DELAY 600 msec Related Items MMC 102 Call Forward MMC 207 Assign VM AA Port MMC 726 VM AA Options MMC 502 Page 2 of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 503 TRUNK WIDE TIMERS Allows certain trunk timer values to be changed on a pertrunk basis or for all trunks It is not ad visable to change these values with the exception of trunk flash time without assistance from Technical Support TIMER RANGE DEFAULT DIAL 408 408i1 Other Systems ANS BAK TM 0100 2500 MSEC 0600 MSEC 00 00 CLEARING
156. d to change the passcode allowing access to MMC 200 Open Customer Programming from its current value PROGRAM KEYS KEYPAD Used to enter passcodes SPEAKER Save data and advance to next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 201 CUST PASSCODE NEW CODE _ 2 Enter new passcode via dial keypad maximum four CUST PASSCODE digits NEW CODE 3 Verify new passcode via dial keypad CUST PASSCODE VERIFY PASSCODE verify successful CUST PASSCODE go to step 4 VERIFY SUCCESS OR PASSCODE verify failure CUST PASSCODE return to step 2 VERIFY FAILURE 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data Passcode 1234 Related Items MMC 200 Open Customer Programming MMC 201 Pages 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 202 CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODES Epes 17 a x e 7 se 17106 408 V Your system supports some or all of the following features DAY NIGHT DISA ALARM ALARM CLR AA RECORD DECT BSI REGISTER This MMC is used to change the passcode for supported features Note The passcode is four digits long Each digit can be 0 9 PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter passcodes SPEAKER Save data and advance to next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 202 CHANGE PASSCODE Display shows DAY NIGHT 0000 2 Press UP or DOWN key to make selection CH
157. d to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 103 201 ANS MODE Display shows RING MODE 2 Dial keyset number e g 205 205 ANS MODE OR RING MODE Press UP or DOWN to select keyset and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor OR Press ANS RLS to select All ALL ANS MODE 3 Dial 0 1 or 2 to change ring mode 205 ANS MODE OR VOICE ANNOUNCE Press UP or DOWN to select ring mode and press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data All keysets RING Ring frequency default 5 Related Items MMC 111 Keyset Ring Tone MMC 103 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 104 STATION Allows the system administrator to enter a name up to 11 characters to identify an individual sta tion Names are written using the keypad Each key press selects a character and moves the cursor to the next position For example if the name is SAM SMITH press the number 7 four times to get the letter S Now press the number 2 once to get the letter A Continue selecting charac ters from the keypad to complete your name Press the programmable A key to toggle between upper and lower case text Tip When the character you want is on the same key as the previous character you typed in press the UP key to move the cursorto the right then sel
158. d to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC A Key 19 24B keyset or key 7 12B keyset or key 1 6B keyset toggles upper and lower case text Example 1 Switching options on yes print or off no do not print ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 725 PAGE HEADER Display shows PRINT YES 2 Dialthe option number e g 00 PAGE HEADER OR PRINT YES Use the UP and DOWN keys to scroll through options and press RIGHT soft key 3 Use the UP and DOWN keys to select YES or NO PAGE HEADER and press the RIGHT soft key to save PRINT NO the data and return to step 2 4 After all desired options have been selected and set press TRSF to exit OR Press SPEAKER to exit and advance to next MMC Example 2 Changing no of lines per page ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 725 PAGE HEADER Display shows PRINT YES 2 Dialthe option number 01 LINE PER PAGE OR 66 LINE PAGE Use the UP and DOWN keys to select and press RIGHT soft key 3 Enter the number of lines per page in the range 01 99 LINE PER PAGE e 9 50 50 LINE PAGE OR Use the UP and DOWN keys to change the number of lines and press the RIGHT soft key to save the data and return to step 2 MMC 725 Page 2 of 3 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 4 After all desired options have been selected and set press TRSF to exit OR Press SPEAKE
159. dialled e The Allowance Table entries are the ONLY exceptions to the Deny Table entries e Listing codes in the Allowance Table with no entries in the Deny Table gives no restriction A wild card in any position in Deny Table means an exception exists in the Al lowance Table for the digits defined by the wild card A wild card at the end of an entry means that more digits may be dialled e Never puta single wild card as an entry in the Allowance Table When changing an entry in the BCDEFG status ALL digits must be entered Use of Deny Table Example Let s assume that you wantto restrict bar the dialling of the following codes to your users 0860 and 0850 car phone numbers 0891and 0898 premium rate numbers 00 International numbers and 01 STD numbers You would setup the Deny Table as follows TOLL DENY TABLE Note The number of entries allowed varies between systems see MMC 702 From the above table 1 means a number is barred e Stations with Toll Level B applied will be barred all the codes listed e Stations with Toll Level C applied will be barred 0891 0898 and 00 calls e Stations with Toll Level D applied will be barred 0891 and 0898 calls e Stations with Toll Level E applied will be barred 0891 0898 and 01 calls 3 6 DCS SPECIAL APPLICATIONS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 e Stations with Toll Levels F or G applied will have no restrictions Use of Wild Cards and the Allo
160. e MMC 728 Page 2 of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 730 AA RECORD GAIN bes cm V 816 7 408i X 408 Used to control AA record gain Note that AA card port numbers differ between systems see Part 2 section 2 3 System Configuration Quick Reference PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 730 381 AAREC GAIN Display shows e g for Compact II 816 REC GAIN 0 0 2 Dial AA number first port in card e g 385 385 AAREC GAIN OR REC GAIN 0 0 Press UP or DOWN to select and press RIGHT soft key 3 Press UP or DOWN to select record gain and press 385 AAREC GAIN RIGHT soft key REC GAIN 1 0 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data 0 0 dB Related Items None MMC 730 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 731 AA RAM CLEAR bes c x cm v 816 7 408i X 408 Used for clearing AA RAM on a per AA card basis The system only accepts the first port as a port field and the LCD shows its selection This will erase the whole message that has been pro grammed previously on the selected card Note that AA c
161. e BRI card Use MMC 418 Card Restart to restart the card PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 423 701 S T MODE Display shows TRUNK 2 Dial BRI trunk number e g 703 703 S T MODE OR TRUNK Press UP or DOWN key to select the port Use the RIGHT soft key to position the cursor under TRUNK or STATION 3 Press UP or DOWN key to make selection TRUNK 703 S T MODE or STATION STATION Press RIGHT soft key to position the cursor under the port number again 4 For other ports repeat steps 2 and 3 5 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data TRUNK Related Items MMC 418 Card Restart MMC 419 BRI Option MMC 424 50 Mapping MMC 423 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 424 50 MAPPING bcs v V s16 408i V 408 x Generates a table by which an ISDN terminal number is mapped onto a BRI STATION port For a detailed description and other MMC related procedures refer to BRI Related MMC Proce dure in the So Overview section of this manual see Part 3 Special Applications Note For each BRI access two adjacent ports are assigned You need only map a number onto one of the two ports You
162. e e tete nett ei a ER Pee 1 2 1 3 3 Station Level rre Ced Pea s 1 3 14 Keys Used for Programming eene 1 3 1 41 Soft Keys n eot iret es dtc n 1 3 1 4 2 Other Keys i Re p e UNE Eee Gece UE eem t 1 3 1 5 Programming Procedures sus osa onec c ex ree e a er orgia 1 4 1 5 1 Precautions When Programming eme 1 4 1 5 2 Opening System or Customer Level Programming 1 4 1 5 3 Opening Station Level Programming 1 5 1 5 4 Programming DCS 408 and 408i 5 5 1 5 2 Program MMC List and Default Data 2 1 21 Program LIst repr rera eer teni ge ee ri run 2 1 227 2 3 23 System Configuration Quick 2 9 3 Special Applications L Voice Mail Auto Attendant 3 2 Individual ie EE De eati ts 3 4 CLIP Calling Line Identification 3 5 Toll Restriction Call Barring Overview eee 3 6 a aA 3 8 4 MMC Ss numerical order
163. e last 10 station groups 510 519 816 3 created from the last 3 station groups 507 509 GROUP TYPES 0 NORMAL GROUP 1 VMAA GROUP Can only have distribute or sequential ringing 2 UCD GROUP Has wrap up capability 3 AA GROUP Can only have distribute or sequential ringing 4 CADENCE Can only have distribute or sequential ringing Options not available on 408 408i systems Other possible entries for DCS systems only are 3801 3820 COM BELL This device is a common bell relay on a Trunk A card 3601 3640 RING PAGE This device is ring over an external page zone output of a Trunk A card FEATURE KEY 0 TYPE Group type Normal VM AA UCD AA 1 RING Ring mode see Ring Modes below 2 OVERFLOW Overflow time 3 TRSF Group transfer time 4 NEXT PORT Overflow port 5 MEMBER Group member e g station 202 RING MODES 0 SEQUENTIAL The first idle station listed in the group will ring If the first is busy the next idle station will ring 1 DISTRIBUTE The first call will ring the first station listed in the group The next call will ring the next station listed in the group MMC 601 Page 1 of 3 DCS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL 2 MMC PROGRAMS NOVEMBER 2001 UNCONDITION All the stations listed in the group will ring Busy stations will re ceive off hook ring if setin MMC 300 The maximum number of stations allowed to ring unconditionally for a group is DCS 32 Compact 10 8162 16 408 408i 8 Note When a group
164. e your name Press the programmable A key to toggle between upper and lower case text Tip When the character you want is on the same key as the previous character you typed in press the UP key to move the cursor to the right then select the character The key can be used for the following special characters in sequence of key presses PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry A Key 19 24B keyset or key 7 12B keyset or key 1 6B keyset toggles upper and lower case text ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 106 201 SPEED NAME Display shows 00 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 SPEED NAME OR 00 Press UP or DOWN to select station and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor If selected station has no speed dial bins the display 205 SPEED NAME will be as shown and a new station may be selected NO SPEED BLOCK 3 Dial speed dial location e g 01 205 SPEED NAME OR 01 Press UP or DOWN to scroll through location numbers and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 4 Enterthe location name using the procedure 205 SPEED NAME described above and press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 MMC 106 Page 1 of 2 01 5 SMITH _ DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 5 Press TRSF to store and exit OR
165. ect status and press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 MMC 108 Page 1 of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 4 Press TRSF to exit OR Press SPEAKER to advance to next MMC Default Data Related Items Port No Follows hardware position Type Follows phone type Tenant Number 1 DCS only Pickup Group 01 SGR None Boss Secr None Page None Day COS No 01 or 1 Night COS No 01 or 1 MMC 301 Assign Station COS MMC 302 Pickup Groups MMC 303 Assign Boss Secretary MMC 601 Assign Station Group MMC 604 Assign Station to Page Zone MMC 803 Assign Tenant Group DCS only MMC 108 Page 2 of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 109 DATE DISPLAY Allows the system administrator to select the date and time display mode on a perstation basis or system wide 0 COUNTRY Sets overall display format and has two options 0 2 ORIENTAL MM DD DAY 1 WESTERN DAY DD MON HH MM 1 CLOCK Sets format of clock display and has two options 0 12 HOUR Displays 1 P M as 01 00 1 24 HOUR Displays 1 P M as 13 00 2 DISPLAY Sets format of DAY and MONTH display and has two options 0 UPPER CASE Displays Friday as FRI and March as MAR 1 LOWER CASE Displays Friday as Fri and March as Mar PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data
166. ectthe character The key can be used for the following special characters in sequence of key presses PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry A Key 19 24B keyset or key 7 12B keyset or key 1 6B keyset toggles upper and lower case text ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 104 201 STN NAME Display shows 2 Dialstation number e g 205 205 STN NAME OR Press UP or DOWN to select station and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Enterthe station name using the procedure described 205 STN NAME above and press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 SAM SMITH 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data None Related Items None MMC 104 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 105 STATION SPEED DIAL Allows the system administrator to program personal speed dial numbers for stations This may be particularly useful for single line telephones which are more difficult to program by the station user Each station can have up to five blocks of speed dials each containing 10 numbers giv ing a total of 50 numbers assigned to itin MMC 606 Assign Speed Block By default each sta tion has one block for 10 numbers ass
167. eed Dial 2 Char Length Character Length Dial 3 Parity Parity Bit Dial 4 Retry Count Number of Retries Dial 5 Stop Bit Stop Bit Dial 6 Wait Time Message Wait Time Dial 7 DSR Check DSR Check on off Compact Il 816 and 408 408i only SIM Pair No of the station connected to the Serial Interface Module SIM DCS only SERVICE TYPE Each port can be set to one of the following service types Note that the services available depend on the type of system being programmed For example DCS and CII systems provide all the following services while 408 408i systems provide PC MMC and SMDR only Type Description PC MMC PC application SMDR SMDR report call logging UCD REPT UCD report on request by the supervisor or daily UCD SMDR Both SMDR and UCD report will be generated Dedicated Switch Link Interface MMC 804 Page 1 of 3 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 SPEED BPS DCS CII 816 408 408i 2 3 5 Num gt CS CHARACTER LENGTH PARITY DialO None Diall Odd STOP BIT PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear entry when valid ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 804 SYS I O PORT 1 Display shows SERVICE PC MMC 2 Enter desired port via dial keypad e g 2 note SYS I O PORT 2 408 408i sy ste
168. elect 204 3801 COM BELL Display shows current setting CONTINUOUS Note Display differs according to system OR 363 COM LD BELL CONTINUOUS 2 Dial common bell number OR Press UP or DOWN key to make selection of common bell numbers and press RIGHT soft key to advance cursor 3 Dial 0 for continuous or 1 for interrupted operation 3801 COM BELL OR INTERRUPTED Use UP or DOWN to scroll through options OR Press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 363 COM LD BELL INTERRUPTED 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data Continuous Related Items MMC 203 Assign UA Device MMC 219 Common Relay Service Type MMC 601 Assign Station Group MMC 204 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 205 ASSIGN LOUD BELL pcs c x cm V 816 V 408i V 408 Y Designates the station that controls the loud bell ring output of one of the following DCS systems a Trunk A card Each Trunk A card has one loud bell output these outputs are given a Directory Number of 3901 3920 as a default value to enable them to be assigned Compact 1 systems a Misc card assigned in MMC 219 Common Relay Service 816 and 408 408i systems a base board assigned in MMC 219 Common Relay Service Type The loud bell will follow the ring cadence of the designated station Only a station can be as signed to control the loud bell a station
169. em MMC 116 Alarm and Message can be programmed to remind the station user to read the memo s Each memo can be up to 13 characters long and is entered using the dial keypad For example press 6 once to enter the letter M and press 3 twice for an E Continue selecting charac ters from the keypad to complete the memo Press the programmable A key to toggle between upper and lower case text Tip When the character you want is on the same key as the previous character you typed in press the UP key to move the cursorto the right then selectthe character The key be used for the following special characters in sequence of key presses PROGRAM KEYS KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry A Key 19 24B keyset or key 7 12B keyset or key 1 6B keyset toggles uppercase and lowercase text ACTION D IS 1 Open programming and select 113 201 VIEW MEMO Display shows 1 2 Dialthe station number e g 205 205 VIEW MEMO OR 1 Press UP or DOWN to select station and PLAY press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Dial memo number 1 3 205 VIEW MEMO OR 1 Press UP or DOWN to select and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 4 Press RIGHT soft key to move cursor and add 205 VIEW MEMO memo via dial keypad using above procedure 1 CALL TOM 5 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Pres
170. em Speed Dial By Name MMC 705 Page 2 of 2 MMC PROGRAMS NOVEMBER 2001 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 706 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME Allows a name up to 11 characters to be entered for each system speed dial number you set up This name enables the number to be located when using the directory dial feature The direc tory dial feature allows the display keyset user to select a speed dial number by searching for the name Names are written using the keypad Each key press selects a character and moves the cursor to the next position For example if the name is SAM SMITH press the number 7 four times to get the letter S Now press the number 2 once to get the letter A Continue selecting charac ters from the keypad to complete your name Press the programmable A key to toggle between upper and lower case text Tip When the character you want is on the same key as the previous character you typed in press the UP key to move the cursor to the right then select the character The key can be used for the following special characters in sequence of key presses PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry TRSF Used to store and exit MMC Key 19 24B keyset or key 7 12B keyset
171. equire the ability to use speed dialling The Free List shows how many blocks are left to be assigned One block has 10 entries The number of blocks you can assign to system speed dials will depend on the maximum allowed per system DCS has a maximum of 1500 entries in a system a maximum of 500 50 blocks be as signed as system speed dials and the rest 100 blocks can be allocated as personal speed di als with a maximum of 5 blocks per station Compact has a maximum of 500 entries in a system 50 blocks all of these can be allocated to system speed dials or they can be used as personal numbers with a maximum of 5 blocks per station Compact Il has a maximum of 600 entries in a system a maximum of 500 50 blocks can be assigned as system speed dials and the rest 10 blocks can be allocated as personal numbers with a maximum of 5 blocks per station 816 has a maximum of 500 entries in a system a maximum of 300 30 blocks for system speed dials while the rest 20 blocks can be allocated as personal numbers with a maximum of 5 blocks per station 408 408i has a maximum of 300 entries in a system a maximum of 200 20 blocks for system speed dials while the rest 10 blocks can be allocated as personal numbers with a maximum of 50 per station The options you can select are SYSTEM to set system speed dials EXT to set individual extension speed dials PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through op
172. er Similarly where an MMC relates to both systems some features available on the 408i system may not be available on the 408 system and vice versa This will be indicated in the MMC description where appropriate These systems also differ significantly from all other keyphone systems both in size and physical appearance In comparison with other systems when programming your 408 or 408i e Extension group and trunk numbers are two digits by default e g extension 21 trunk 71 etc All other systems use 3 digit numbers by default e g extension 201 trunk 701 etc Examples of programming shown in this manual use 3 digit num bers for convenience only Unless changed by the system installer in MMC 724 e You can set up to four Normal station groups Group types AA VM AA and UCD are not permitted e Only two trunk groups 8 and 9 are available All other systems support groups 9 and 80 82 1 5 DCS MMC LIST COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 Part 2 Program MMC List amp Default Data 2 1 Program MMC List 102 CALL FORWARD 103 SET ANSWER MODE 400 CUSTOMER ON OFF PERTRUNK STATION NAME STATION SPEED DIAL STATION SPEED DIAL NAME KEY EXTENDER TRUNKNAME STATION STATUS DATE DISPLAY 406 TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT STATION ON OFF KEYSET RING TONE ALARM REMINDER 7409 TRUNK STATUS READ VIEW MEMO NUMBER STATION VOLUME 115 SET PROGRAMMED
173. ere DN2 is used this specific digit is sent between the DN1 and the DN2 information Both DN1 and DN2 must be set to YES for SEPARATOR to be sent This signal is sent when the calling station or C O line hangs up Under this VM AA option are several customising appli cations A call originating directly from another station in the sys tem This indicates that a call was forwarded to the VM AA port from a station with CALL FORWARD ALL set This indicates that a call was forwarded to the VM AA port from a station with CALL FORWARD BUSY set This indicates that a call was forwarded to the VM AA port from a station with CALL FORWARD NO ANSWER set A call is recalling the VM AA port after being transferred and not answered A C O call has gone directly to VM AA e g trunk 717 DIL to VM AA A call has OVERFLOWED to the VM AA port from a sta tion group A DDI call has called the VM AA port A message button or message reply feature code has been used to call the VM AA port DTMF digits can be sent in place of normal system tones Digits can be assigned to the following tones MMC 726 Page 1 of 3 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 TONES 0 DIAL TONE 1 BUSY TONE 2 RINGBACK TONE 3 DND NO MORE 4 HDSET ANSWER 5 SPKER ANSWER Note The call progress tones will automatically be set to the default values if the SMDI VMS SET option in MMC 210 is turned on PROGRAM KEYS UP a
174. ernal call upon the expiration of a timer see MMC 501 System Wide Timers Off Hook Select Timer option to a predetermined number when the handset is lifted The number can be a maximum of 18 digits including pauses flash etc in the dial string the access code for a trunk is not counted PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL B Used to insert a flash code F Ct Used to insert a pause code P D Used to insert a pulse tone conversion code C ET Used to mask unmask following digits shows as or Keys A to F are keys 19 to 24 on 24B keysets or keys 7 to 12 on 12 keysets or keys 1 to 6 on 6B keysets ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 306 201 HOT LINE Display shows NONE Press RIGHT soft key to advance cursor 2 Enter station number via dial keypad e g 201 201 HOT LINE OR NONE Press UP or DOWN to make selection and press RIGHT soft key 2 Enter station number to automatically dial via keypad 201 HOT LINE e g 202 or press UP or DOWN to select 202 OR Enter a trunk to automatically dial e g 701 press UP 201 HOT LINE or DOWN to select then press the RIGHT soft key and 701 01235987654_ enter a maximum of 18 digits to dial 3 Press RIGHT soft key
175. ervice COS If you want to make a copy of an exist ing COS use MMC 700 If an unsupervised conference feature is allowed a programmed CONF key must be available to allow reentry into a conference call For an overview of toll restriction call barring refer to Part 3 of this manual Special Appli cations PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC TOLL LEVEL OPTIONS DIAL DIGIT TOLL LEVEL 0 A 1 B 2 3 D 4 E 5 F 6 G 7 H ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 701 COS CONTENTS 01 Display shows TOLL LEVEL A 2 Dial COS e g 06 COS CONTENTS 06 OR TOLL LEVEL A Press UP or DOWN key to select COS and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Dial toll level e g 2 COS 5 06 OR TOLL LEVEL C Press UP or DOWN key to select option 4 Press RIGHT soft key to advance to COS options COS CONTENTS 06 000 AA CALER YES Use tables and data below to set options 5 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC MMC 701 Page 1 of 7 DCS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL MMC PROGRAMS NOVEMBER 2001 The following COS Feature Lists 1 4 are for DCS Compact Il 816 and 408 408i systems re spectively 1 DCS cos FEATURE LIST BY OPTION NUMBER 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 012 013 015 016
176. estination station is busy of deciding if the call is to be camped on to the destination station or of clearing the call There is an extra option to adjust the number of digits to be compared by skipping the pro grammed counts from the first digit point provided by the Network If there is no matching num ber in DDI NUMBER TABLE the system routes this call to the operator group There is a total of 200 entries DCS Compact II systems 50 entries 816 systems or 20 entries 408i systems Each entry consists of the following fields 0 DIGITS DGT Digits to be received max 12 digits Wild card is a valid entry 1 DAY DEST D Destination in day mode Can be a station a station group a trunk or trunk group Repeat B will be acceptable to bypass 2 NIGHT DEST N Destination in day mode Can be a station a station group a trunk ora trunk group Repeat B will be acceptable to bypass 3 CALL WAIT CW Toggles YES or NO 4 DELETE Decides the number of digits not to be translated from the first digit received This is useful when the received digits are prefixed with the same digit s 5 NAME Gives a name to an individual entry 11 characters maximum Names are written using the keypad in the same way as speed dial names see MMC 706 PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HO
177. exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data DISA PSWD On LCR ENABLE Off SMDI VMS SET Off PERI UCD SET Off CID CODE INS Off DISA MOH Off TRANSFER MOH Off DSP SSPDNAME Off DID BSY ROUT Off DID NOT ROUT On ALL PICK UP Off ARD TONE CHK On VPN ENABLE Off ISDNTRK BUSY Off IN TOLL CHK Off ISDN PROGCON Off Related Items None MMC 210 Page 2 of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 211 DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT Designates which devices will ring when a doorphone button is pressed for both day and night mode Two types of device can ring station and station group these are listed below with their default directory numbers DEVICE DEFAULT DIRECTORY NUMBER 255 Compacti 86 408 408 201 349 201 308 201 216 500 529 500 519 500 509 50 53 PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Clears previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 211 201 DOOR RING Display shows first doorphone D 500 500 If there is no doorphone interface module you see DOOR NOT EXIST 2 Dial doorphone number e g 210 210 DOOR RING OR D 500 500 Press UP or DOWN to scroll through doorphone numbers and use the RIGHT soft key to move cursor OR Press ANS RLS to select all door ring ELDON BIO
178. ext MMC Default Data Related Items TX Level 0 MMC PROGRAMS NOVEMBER 2001 TSW GAIN CONTROL SLT gt SLT 2 0 112 253 354 455 556 657 758 TSW Gain Only some of the following may apply to your system None SLTAOSLT SLT ATRK SLT ODTRK ATRK SLT gt ATRK DTRK DTRK SLT DTRK3DTRK DECTSLT DECT gt ATRK DECT gt DTRK SLTODECT ATRK9DECT DTRK9DECT DECTDECT MMC 805 Page 2 of 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 9 6 0 1 9 1 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 9 6 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 DCS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL 806 Allows the pre programming of a slot for a specific card For example after the system is n stalled and a new card is added running this program causes the system to accept the card for what it is and not for what it is not MMC PROGRAMS NOVEMBER 2001 CARD PRE INSTALL cs 7 a Tv 7 sm 7 qmi X X The procedure differs slightly for each type of system as described below PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER m DCSPROCEDURE ACTION 1 Open programming and select 806 Display shows Enter cabinet number e g 3 OR Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor Enter slot number e g 5 OR Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to return
179. ext MMC Default Data None Related Items MMC 722 Station Key Programming MMC 723 System Key Programming MMC 507 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 508 CALL COST Allows the system administrator to set the Call Cost attributes generated by the system during a call This information can be displayed on the keyphone LCD during a call or as an SMDR e cord Attributes are as follows 0 UNIT COST PER MP When the system is installed to receive MP on a C O outgoing call It is used for generating total call cost by multiplying it by the number of pulses Allows a maximum value of 5000 1 CALL COST RATE This generates additional call cost calculated by multiplying this rate by the original call cost Ranges from 100 to 255 WARNING e Changing a value when there is a call in progress may result in an inaccurate call cost e This MPD facility requires the Meter Pulse Detection version of the trunk card It is not avail able on the standard product PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 508 UNIT COST PER MP Display shows 0200PENCE 2 DialOor1 e g 1 CALL COST RATE OR 100 Press UP or DOWN key for selection and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Enter new value e g 110 for 110 perce
180. fer to tables 1 12 below PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 311 256 SIM PARA Display shows SIM TYPE DTE 2 Enter station number connected to SIM e g 257 257 SIM PARA from dial keypad SIM TYPE DTE OR Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Enter desired selection from table 1 00 10 e g 01 257 SIM PARA OR CALL MODE AWITH Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor Refer to table 1 for your selected option and go to the table indicated e g 3 to enter required CALL MODE MANUAL value e g 0 using dial keypad or by pressing UP or DOWN key Press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 4 Repeat step 3 for all required options 00 10 in table 1 5 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC TABLE 1 SIM PARAMETER 00 SIM TYPE Table 2 01 CALL MODE Table 3 02 ANS MODE Table 4 03 AUTO BAUD Table 5 04 DTR CHECK Table 6 05 ECHO Table 7 06 PROTOCOL Table 8 07 SPEED Table 9 08 CHAR LENGTH Table 10 09 PARITY E Table 11 10 STOP BIT Table 12 MMC 311 DCS Page 1 of 2 DCS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL TABLE 2 SIM TYPE TABLE 8 PROTOC
181. gh options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 704 0123456789 k Display shows X 111111111111 2 Press UP or DOWN key to select X Y or Z 0123456789 k and press RIGHT soft key to advance cursor to 111111111111 option line 3 Press UP or DOWN key to move cursor to digit s 0123456789 k desired 0 e g 5 and enter 1 or 0 as required X 111110111111 Press LEFT or RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 to make more selections if required 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data AIIX Y amp Zz1 Related Items MMC 702 Toll Deny Table MMC 703 Toll Allowance Table MMC 704 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 705 ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL Allow you to assign system speed dialling numbers The number of entries available for pro gramming is 500 DCS and Compact 11 or 300 816 or 200 408 408i see MMC 606 Assign Speed Block Each speed dial number consists of a trunk or trunk group access code e g 9 fol lowed by a separator C and up to 24 digits to be dialled These dialled digits can be 0 9 If the system recognises a valid trunk or trunk group access number it will automatically insert the separator System speed dials are n
182. gramming and select 750 VM CARD RESTART Display shows DOWNLOAD YES 2 Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO download VM CARD RESTART OR CARD RESTART NO Press UP or DOWN key to select Press RIGHT soft key 3 Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO restart VM CARD RESTART OR CARD RESTART YES Press UP or DOWN key to select Press RIGHT soft key 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data DOWNLOAD YES CARD RESTART NO Related Items MMC 751 Assign Mailbox Cadence programming SVMi 4 programming MMC 750 DCS Compact II Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 751 ASSIGN MAILBOX Cadence amp SVMi 4 pcs V a x 74 s16 x 4081 X 408 X Assigns mailboxes to each station or station group Mailboxes are assigned to all stations or groups flagged as YES in this MMC if DOWNLOAD YES is setin MMC 750 during VM card start up Groups supported are 500 529 for DCS and 500 519 for Compact Il New boxes can be added through Voice Mail administration or by using this MMC PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 751 ASSIGN MAIL BOX Display shows 301 YES 2 Dial station or group number e g 302 ASSIGN MAIL BOX OR 302
183. ible at this level 1 3 2 Customer Level This level is entered via MMC 200 and requires the customer s passcode It allows ac cess to station programs and system programs permitted by the system installer in MMC 802 When the system administrator uses the customer passcode to access sta tion programs data for all stations can be viewed or changed Changes can be made either system wide or to selected keysets The system administrator should also refer to the System Administration manual for their keyphone system if this is available e Accessible MMCs atthis level are designated by the installer 1 2 DCS INTRODUCTION COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 1 3 3 Station Level The system administrator or keyset user can access certain programs at a station with out using a passcode At this level only data for the selected station can be changed You should refer to the instructions provided in the Samsung DCS Keyset User Guide e Accessible MMCs atthis level are nos 100 121 1 4 Keys Used for Programming Programming may be done from any 6 button 6B 12 button 12B or 24 button 24B keyset with a liquid crystal display LCD Refer to the Samsung DCS Keyset User Guide for a full description of keyset operation 1 4 1 Soft Keys The three keys directly below the LCD are called soft keys The left hand soft key is desig nated as the LEFT soft key This key is used to save any changed data while program ming or
184. igned Speed dials are numbered 00 49 Each speed dial may contain a trunk or trunk group access code e g 9 followed by a separator C and up to 24 digits to be dialled These dialled digits can be 0 9 If the system recognises a valid trunk or trunk group access number it will automatically insert the separator PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry B Used to insert a flash code F A Used to insert a pause code P D Used to insert a pulse tone conversion code C ET Used to mask unmask following digits shows as or F Used to enter name for speed dial bin see MMC 106 Keys A to F are keys 19 to 24 on 24B keysets or keys 7 to 12 on 12B keysets or keys 1 to 6 on 6B keysets ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 105 201 SPEED DIAL Display shows 00 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 SPEED DIAL OR 00 Press UP or DOWN to select station and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor If selected station has no speed dial blocks assigned 205 SPEED DIAL the display will be as shown and a new station may be NO SPEED BLOCK selected 3 Enter speed dial number e g 05 205 SPEED DIAL OR 05 Press UP or DOWN to select location and press RIGHT Soft key to move cursor 4 Entertrunk access code
185. ilable in both day and night mode ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 410 701 DISA LINE Display shows NORMAL 2 Dial trunk number e g 704 704 DISA LINE OR NORMAL Press UP or DOWN key to select trunk and press RIGHT soft key OR OR Press ANS RLS key to select all trunks ALL DISA LINE 3 Dial an option 0 3 from above table 704 DISA LINE 2 NIGHT Press UP or DOWN key to select trunk and press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data All trunks normal Related Items MMC 101 Change User Passcode MMC 500 System Wide Counters MMC 210 Customer On Off DISA PSWD option MMC 410 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 411 ASSIGN 1 SIGNAL NotUsed in UK MMC 411 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 412 ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL pes c 7 V 816 X 408 X 408 X Allows for the assignment of AC15 cards for proper signalling This MMC is only for analogue types of AC15 trunks These trunks can also use the translation tables in MMC 714 DDI Number and Name Translation The AC15 trunks are allowed the use of translation tables via MMC 416 Assign AC15 Translation The signalling condition types are as follows 0 IMMEDIATE START 1 DELAYED START 2 WINK START 3 NO ANSWER BACK 4 DIRECT BACK PROGRAM KE
186. ilable on all systems Refer to the following table for details a tick means available FEATURE DESCRIPTION SYSTEM DCS Cll e 408 408 DISA PSWD Determines whether outside customers are required to enter DISA passcode Yesz ON LCRENABLE ENABLE Enables LCR feature in the system LCR feature in the Enables LCR feature in the system VMS SET Allows SMDI integration through RS 232 port for the ex ternal PC based Voice Mail system PERI UCD SET Periodic UCD information provider Enables UCD statis tics data on a per UCD group basis to print out on the I O port which has been set as SMDR or UCD REPT in real X time see MMC 501 PERI UCD REPORT timer option This allows extended manipulation of the information by an external third party provided software package CID CODE INS Allows the digit 1 to be automatically inserted for a toll 7 7 408i onl call Notused UK y DISA MOH An additional option that can be presented to outside DISA callers a variable indication provided by an MOH source instead of a fixed DISA dial tone TRANSFER Callers who have been transferred from an extension or UCD group or AA group will hear MOH until answered by the called extension instead of ring back tone DSP SSPDNAME LCD displays programmed name of SYSTEM SPEED bin in MMC 706 if it has been programmed if not itshows digits programmed in MMC 705 even ifthis is setto ON
187. ile the DAILY alarm rings every day at the same time Dial 0 NOTSET Diall TODAY Dial2 DAILY PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 112 201 ALM CLK 1 Display shows HHMM 2NOTSET 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 ALM CLK 1 OR HHMM 2NOTSET Press UP or DOWN to select station and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Dial alarm number e g 2 205 ALM CLK 2 OR HHMM 2NOTSET Press UP or DOWN to select alarm and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor OR Press LEFT soft key to return to step 2 4 Enteralarm time in 24 hour clock format 205 ALM CLK 2 e g 1300 1300 NOTSET Display will automatically advance to step 5 5 Dial valid entry from above list for alarm type e g 2 205 ALM CLK 2 DAILY HHMM 130023 DAILY OR Press UP or DOWN to select alarm type and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor and return to step 2 6 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data Alarms set to NOTSET Related Items None MMC 112 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 113 VIEW MEMO NUMBER Allows the system administrator to enter memos on stations Up to three memos can be entered depending on your syst
188. ing Destination Night Ring Destination 1 06 Dial DTMF Dial Pulse Day Toll Restriction PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 409 701 TRK STATUS Display shows e g for Compact II PORT NO EX1 01 2 Enter trunk number via dial keypad e g 704 704 TRK STATUS OR PORT NO EX1 04 Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to advance cursor 3 Enter desired option 00 12 from table above 704 TRK STATUS OR 1A2 EMULATE OFF Press UP or DOWN key to make selection 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC MMC 409 Page of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 Default Data Related Items Port Number Trunk port number Tenant 1 Loop 1A2 Emulation OFF ON Line Dial DTMF Day Toll F STN Night Tollz F STN Day Ring Dest 500 50 for 408 408 Night Ring Dest 500 50 for 408 4081 MOH Source Tone DISA Status Normal MMC 400 Customer On Off Per Trunk MMC 401 Line MMC 402 Trunk Dial Type MMC 403 Trunk Toll Class MMC 404 Trunk Name MMC 406 Trunk Ring Assignment MMC 408 Assign Trunk Music On
189. ing and select 426 701 TRUNK GAIN Display shows RX 0 0 TX 0 0 2 Dial trunk number e g 704 704 TRUNK GAIN OR RX 0 0 TX 40 0 Press UP or DOWN key to select trunk and press RIGHT soft key OR OR Press ANS RLS to select ALL trunks ALL TRUN K GAIN 0 0 TX 40 0 3 Press UP or DOWN key to select trunk RX gain 704 TRUNK GAIN and press RIGHT soft key RX 1 0 0 0 4 Press UP or DOWN key to select trunk TX gain 704 TRUNK GAIN and press RIGHT soft key RX 4210 10 5 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data RX 0 0 0 0 dB for all trunks Related Items None MMC 426 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 427 2 SIGNAL Not Used in UK MMC 427 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 428 ASSIGN TRUNK TRUNK USE pcs c x cm V s16 408 x 408 x Used to control whether an incoming trunk can dial calls for specific trunks In the following ample you don t want trunk 705 to dial calls for 708 PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 428 701 USE 702 Display shows DIAL YES
190. ions DENY 005 BCDEFG 21X 000000 3 Press UP or DOWN key to move cursor along line until DENY 001 BCDEFG under toll class mark e g E 212 000100 Enter a 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press RIGHT soft key to return to step 1 OR Press LEFT soft key to return to step 2 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data All entries are set to 0 Related Items MMC 301 Assign Station COS MMC 701 Assign COS Contents MMC 703 Toll Allowance Table MMC 704 Assign Wild Character MMC 702 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE Makes toll restriction call barring easy and flexible There are 500 entries for DCS 001 500 200 entries for Compact Il and 816 001 200 and 100 entries for 408 408i 001 100 permitted in the Allowance Table Each entry index up to 12 digits can be assigned to a class of service With the use of wild cards see MMC 704 Assign Wild Character more flexibility can be built into toll restriction There are six toll levels B to G that are programmable Toll level A is set as unre stricted by default and toll level H is set as internal calls only by default PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry WILD CARD
191. is designated as PRS detection the call duration timer will be started and the results printed on the SMDR record PRS detection is also essential for dropping a trunk to trunk conversation which is unsupervised by an internal party ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 414 701 TRK PRS Display shows NONE 2 Enter desired trunk number e g 705 705 TRK PRS OR NONE Press UP or DOWN key to select trunk and use LEFT or RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Press UP or DOWN key to scroll through options 705 TRK PRS and use LEFT or RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 MPD 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data NONE Related Items MMC 5068 Call Cost MMC 414 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 415 REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA Epes 7 4 sm aos V 408 X Allows the system administrator or technician to enable or disable the reporting of abandoned C O calls for which CLIP information has been collected on a per trunk basis There are two options for this MMC 0 REPORT NO Abandoned call records for incoming calls with CLIP information will not be printed on SMDR or stored in the system abandoned call list These records will continue to be stored in the station review list 1REPORT YES Abandoned call records for incoming calls with CLIP information will be printed on SMDR or stored in the system
192. isplay shows BSI SLOT 3 DBS 1 DOWNLOADING However if a downloading failure occurs the display BSI SLOT 3 DBS 1 shows DOWNLOAD FAIL 5 Press TRSF button to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER button to store and advance to next MMC Default Data None Related Items MMC 737 DECT System Code MMC 738 DECT Clear Registration MMC 741 BSI Card Restart MMC 742 BSI Status MMC 743 DBS Status MMC 744 BSI Registration On Off MMC 739 DCS Compact II Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 74 STATION PAIR v v V Allows a station such as a DECT handset to be assigned as a secondary to a primary key phone station in the system This will allow all features to be set or cancelled from either station and both will ring when the primary receives a call PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 740 201 PRIMARY Display shows SECONDARY NONE 2 Enter the primary station number via dial keypad 201 PRIMARY e g 201 SECONDARY NONE OR Press UP or DOWN to select and press RGHT soft key 3 Enter the secondary station number via dial keypad 201 PRIMARY e g 205 SECONDARY 205 OR Press UP or DOWN to select and press RGHT soft key 4 Press TRSF
193. l be accepted if the following condition is satisfied Table 3 Calls with other BC or HLC will be rejected 3 10 DCS SPECIAL APPLICATIONS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 DESTINATION Speech Telephony DGP Digital keyphone SLT ICM CO ring in MMC 208 3 1 kHz Audio Telephony SLT ICM CO ring in MMC 208 3 1 kHz Audio None DGP SLT ICM CO ring in MMC 208 3 1 kHz Audio Fax G2 3 SLT DATA ring in MMC 208 Table 3 Accepted BC and HLC when destination is a non SO terminal Accepted BC and HLC combinations on the ISDN TRK or So port For calls between So and ISDN TRK the following BC and HLC combinations Table 4 will be accepted regardless of which party is the originator Table 4 Accepted BC and HLC when destination is a non SO terminal Supported bearer capability Speech Unrestricted Data 3 1 kHz Audio 7 kHz Audio Video Supported high layer compatibility Telephony G3 Fax G4 Fax Mixed Mode Teletex Videotex Telex OSI DCS SPECIAL APPLICATIONS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 Supported ISDN supplementary services Note Sub address of incoming outgoing call AOC ETSI AOC D Currency Unit ETSI AOC E Currency Unit Italy Holland Portugal Belgium Table 5 Supported ISDN supplementary services Installation The installation procedure is as follows 1 Switch off the power to the system 2 Insertthe card in the appropriate slot 3 Execute MMC 811 Reset System
194. lated Items None MMC 116 Page 2 of 2 MMC PROGRAMS NOVEMBER 2001 DISPLAY 201 ALM REM 1 HHMM gt NOTSET 205 ALM REM 1 HHMM gt NOTSET ALL ALM REM 1 HHMM gt NOTSET 205 ALM REM 2 HHMM NOTSET 205 ALM REM 2 HHMM 13002NOTSET 205 ALM REM 2 HHMM 13002 DAILY 205 ALM REM 2 Meeting DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 119 SET CLIP DISPLAY Des c 7 cu V 816 V 408i v 408 X Allows the system administrator or keyset user to change the order in which CLIP information is displayed on a keyset LCD CLIP display options are as follows 0 NO DISPLAY No CLIP data is displayed 1 NUMBER FIRST CLIP number received from central office is displayed first 2 NAME FIRST CLIP name is displayed first if set in MMC 728 PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SPEAKER Save data and advance to next MMC ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 119 201 CLIP DISP Display shows NAME FIRST 2 Enter station number e g 204 204 CLIP DISP OR NAME FIRST Press UP or DOWN to scroll through stations and press RIGHT soft key to select a station Press ANS RLS to select ALL ALL CLIP DISP OR 3 Dial display option 0 1 or 2 e g 1 204 CLIP DISP Press UP or DOWN to select option and press NUMBER FIRST RIGHT or LEFT soft key to return to step 2 4 Press TR
195. longest waiting call can be held before the system gives a visual alarm to the UCD supervisor VMS UCD MSG Notused in UK VOICE DIAL DELAY Monitors the duration of the interaction between main software and Voice Dial ler MMC 501 Page 6 of 6 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 502 STATION WIDE TIMERS Allows certain station timer values to be changed on a per station basis or for all stations It is not advisable to change these values without assistance from Technical Support 0 NO ANS FWD This timer controls how long the station will ring before a Forward on No Answer takes place Range 001 255 sec 1 DTMF DURATION This timer governs the duration of DTMF digit which is transmitted to an external VM system port It is useful for customising a voice mail system Range 100 9900 msec 2 FIRST DGT DELAY This timer is valuable for the system administrator to insert a suitable delay for generating DTMF digits for commencing in band integra tion Range 100 9900 msec Note It is reasonable for the system administrator to use trial and error to find a suitable value for 1 and 2 above according to the characteristics of the selected VM system PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming an
196. mp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used in some fields where a value is entered or deleted Used to input alpha character A B Used to insert alpha character B 167 Used to insert alpha character C Keys A F are keys 19 24 24B keysets or keys 47 12 12B keysets or keys 1 6 6B keysets ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 726 Display shows EXT FOR DN1 2 Enterthe option number from above list e g 4 SEPARATOR for other options see steps 4 11 NO OR Press UP or DOWN key to make selection Press LEFT soft key to move cursor 3 Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO OR Press UP or DOWN key for selection Press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 SEPARATOR 4 lfoption 0 is selected at step 2 EXT FOR DN1 If option 1 is selected at step 2 TRK FOR DN1 6 Ifoption 2 is selected at step 2 EXT FOR DN2 NO 7 lfoption is selected at step 2 TRK FOR DN2 MMC 726 Page 2 of 3 I lt I lt I lt lt m m m m NO DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 8 If option 4 is selected at step 2 SEPARATOR A valid entry consists of digits 0 9 or alpha NO characters A C 9 Ifoption 5 is selected at step 2 DISCONECT SIGNAL A valid entry consists of digits 0 9 or alpha C characters A C 10 If option 6 is selected a
197. ms have port 1 only SERVICE SMDR OR Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Enter parameter option from the above option list via SYS I O PORT 2 dial keypad e g 1 BAUD 9600 BPS OR Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor MMC 804 Page 2 of 3 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 4 Enter desired value via dial keypad e g 19200 baud SYS I O PORT 2 OR BAUD 19200 BPS Press UP or DOWN key to display value and press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 5 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data DCS CII 816 408 408i Port 1 Port2 Port 1 EM SMDR SMDR Baud Rate bps 9600 9600 9600 Char Length bits 8 8 8 Parity 7 1 None None Retry Count 3 03 03 StpBit 11 1 1 Wait Time msec 300 DSR Check 0 OFF 0 SIMPair 7 None Related Items PC MMC programming SMDR options MMC 804 Page 3 of 3 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 805 TX LEVEL AND GAIN Allows the system administrator to set the base level of TX volume and the TSW gain control for nine time switch connect types There are eight 8 volume levels which are controlled by the UP and DOWN keys on the keyset However there 11 possible levels ina DCS or Compa
198. n Background Music Source MMC 408 Assign Trunk Music On Hold Source MMC 309 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 310 LCR CLASS OF SERVICE Assigns the LCR class of service allowed for a station on a perstation basis Eight classes 1 8 can be assigned 408 408i systems have four classes 1 4 PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 310 201 LCR CLASS Display shows LCR CLASS 1 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 LCR CLASS OR LCR CLASS 1 Press UP or DOWN to select station and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor OR OR ALL LCR CLASS Press ANS RLS to select All stations LCR CLASS 3 Dial 1 8 to select class type e g 3 205 LCR CLASS OR LCR CLASS 3 Press UP or DOWN to select class type and press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data Least Cost Routing COS 1 Related Items LCR programming MMC 310 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 311 ASSIGN SIM PARAMETER DCS CI x cil x 816 X 4081 X 408 X Assigns and sets parameters for the serial interface module SIM Re
199. n programming and select 600 OPERATOR GROUP Display shows D 500 N 500 2 Dial day operator group e g 501 OPERATOR GROUP OR D 501 N 500 Press UP or DOWN key to select and press RIGHT soft key 3 Dial night operator group e g 501 OPERATOR GROUP OR D 501 501 Press UP or DOWN key to select and press RIGHT soft key 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data Day 500 50 for 408 4081 Night 500 50 for 408 4081 Related Items MMC 211 Door Ring Assignment MMC 406 Trunk Ring Assignment MMC 601 Assign Station Group MMC 602 Station Group Name MMC 600 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP Assigns stations to groups This provides more flexibility for example if using Uniform Call Dis tribution UCD ACD AA GROUP and VM AA applications A station common bell and ring page can be in more than one group but must all be the same ring type The maximum members per group for each system is DCS 816 408 408i 48 16 3402 12 82 Note device for announcement if used must provide a hookflash and return the call to the group UCD GROUPS Maximum number of UCD groups that can be programmed is as follows DCS 10 created from last 10 station groups 520 529 Compact I 10 created from any station group 501 529 Compact Il 5 created from th
200. n users Also allows call forwarding to be set after the destination has been entered The system allows five types of call forwarding FORWARD ALL FORWARD BUSY FORWARD NO ANSWER and FORWARD EXTERNAL The FORWARD BUSY NO ANSWER option allows both BUSY and NO ANSWER options to be activated at the same time provided that destina tions have already been entered for both FORWARD CANCEL NO ANSWER ALL CALL 4 BUSY NO ANSWER BUSY 5 EXT External 0 1 2 PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 102 201 FORWARD Display shows 0 FORWARD CANCEL 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 FORWARD OR O FORWARD CANCEL Press UP or DOWN to select station and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Dial 0 5 to select forward type 205 FORWARD OR 1 ALL CALL NONE Press UP or DOWN to select forward type and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 4 Dial destination number e g 201 205 FORWARD OR 1 ALL CALL 201 Press UP or DOWN to select destination and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 5 Dial 1 for YES 0 for NO 205 FORWARD OR CURENTLY SET YES Press UP or DOWN to select YES or NO and press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 6 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance
201. n will be muted PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 206 BARGE IN TYPE Display shows NO BARGE IN 2 Dial 0 2 to select barge in type e g 2 BARGE IN TYPE OR WITHOUT TONE Press UP or DOWN to select barge in type and press RIGHT soft key 3 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data NO BARGE IN Related Items MMC 301 Assign Station COS MMC 701 Assign COS Contents MMC 206 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 207 ASSIGN VM AA PORT Enables SLI ports to be designated as NORMAL or VMAA VMAA ports receive digits designated in MMC 726 VM AA Options and also receive a true disconnect signal upon completion of a call Do not make VMAA ports data this will return them to a single line port and stop voice mail inte gration VMAA ports have the equivalent of data protect written in the program and are protected against tones PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 207 209 VMAA PORT Display sh
202. nal page port TRSFER TONE Transfer dial tone DID RNGBACK AC15 ringback tone not 408 systems CO BUSY CO Busy tone CO RINGBACK CO Ringback tone CO DIAL CO Dial tone ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 506 BUSY TONE Display shows INTERRUPT TONE 2 Press UP or DOWN key to select tone e g TRSFER TRSFER TONE and press RIGHT soft key INTERRUPT TONE 3 Dial 0 for INTERRUPT tone or 1 for CONTINUOUS tone OR Press UP or DOWN key to select and press RIGHT soft key MMC 506 Page 1 of 2 DCS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL 4 If you selected INTERRUPT tone dial in new value s for interrupt times must be four digits each sequence on off on off Press RIGHT soft key to advance cursor Press LEFT soft key to retreat cursor If valid entry system returns to step 2 5 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data Related Items Tone BUSY TONE CONFIRM BARGE IN TONE DIAL TONE DND NO MORE TONE ERROR TONE HOLD CAMP ON TONE MESSAGE WAIT TONE RING BACK TONE RING TONE TRANSFER TONE DID RINGBACK CO BUSY CO RINGBACK CO DIAL Note All times are in milliseconds None MMC 506 Page 2 of 2 250 100 500 400 1000 100 1000 350 400 1000 MMC PROGRAMS NOVEMBER 2001 TRSFER TONE 0100 0100 0100 0100 Off On Off 350 350 350 50 50 50 CONTINUOUS 250 250 250 100 100 100 3500 500 3500 CONTINUOUS 200 400 2000 3000 1000 3000 100 1
203. ncludes Compact systems except where otherwise indicated sure the correct country is first selected MMC 812 before carrying out any other programming DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 100 STATION LOCK Allows the system administrator to lock or unlock an individual station or all tations simultane ously The three options are 0 UNLOCKED Unlocks a locked station 1 LOCKED OUT Prevents the station from accessing a C O line and initiating an ex ternal call 2 LOCKED ALL Prevents the station from initiating any actions PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 100 201 STN LOCK Display shows UNLOCKED 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 STN LOCK OR UNLOCKED Use UP and DOWN to select station and use RIGHT soft key to move cursor OR Press ANS RLS to select all stations ALL STN LOCK 2 3 Enter 0 to unlock 1 to lock out or 2 to lock all e g 1 205 STN LOCK OR LOCKED OUT Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 4 Press TRSF to save and exit OR Press SPEAKER to save and advance to next MMC Default Data All stations unlocked Related Items Station user programming M
204. nd advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry MMC 107 Page 1 of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 107 201 EXT MAST Display shows 01 CALL1 OR OR For 408 and 408i systems display shows 21 EXT EXTEND 01 DT71 gt 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 EXT MAST OR 01 CALL1 gt Use UP or DOWN to scroll through station numbers and press RIGHT soft key to move the cursor 3 Enter key number e g 18 205 EXT MAST OR 18DS 25 Press UP and DOWN to scroll through keys and use RIGHT soft key to move the cursor OR Use above table to select desired extender 205 EXT MAST System will return to this step 18 DS DS207 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Note If the RIGHT soft key will not move the cursor to the right you are attempting to add an extender to a key that cannot have one refer to the table above for allowed key extenders Default Data None Related Items MMC 720 Copy Key Programming MMC 721 Save Station Key Programming MMC 722 Station Key Programming MMC 723 System Key Programming MMC 107 Page 2 of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 108 STATION STATUS This is a read only MMC Displays the following attributes of a station port PORT NO Cabinet PORT NO Slot PORT NO 8DLI 01 PORT NO 4DLI 01 7 7 Port
205. ndividual keysets 3 4 DCS SPECIAL APPLICATIONS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation Hardware Provisions ISDN trunk cards Software Provisions The MMCs related to CLIP are listed below with a short description of their uses They are listed in the recommended order in which they should be programmed This sequence is suggested so that installer technician gets a better understanding of how the feature works There is no technical reason to strictly follow this sequence e MMC 312 Used to determine which keysets are allowed to ALLOW CLIP ceive CLIP displays e MMCs 722 723 It is strongly recommended that all keysets allowed STATION amp SYSTEM KEY CLIP in MMC 312 are programmed with a CLIP key PROGRAMMING using this MMC e MMC 728 Allows for the creation of a list of names that corre CLIP TRANSLATION TABLE to numbers received from the Central Office C O These names will be displayed when a call rings in thathas NUMBER ONLY data provided by the e MMC 725 Provides the ability to print CLIP data and abandoned SMDR OPTIONS calls on the Station Message Detail Recording SMDR report e MMC 119 Station users can determine what CLIP data is dis SET CLIP DISPLAY played when a call rings atthe user s station e MMC 501 You may need to adjust the CLIP DISPLAY timer This SYSTEM WIDE TIMERS is the length of time that CLIP dat
206. next MMC Default Data DAY MSG 49 NIGHT MSG 49 ALTER MSG NONE INVLID MSG 64 NO ANS MSG 51 XFER MSG 53 BUSY MSG 152 NO 5 MSG 50 NO ACT MSG 59 OFF 5 01 SEC RETRY CNT 3 TRANS TABLE 01 BUSY DEST 500 NO ANSWER DEST 500 NO ACT DEST 500 INVALID DEST 500 Related Items MMC 732 AA Translation Table MMC 734 AA Message Match MMC 733 Page 2 of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 734 AA MESSAGE MATCH bes cm V 816 7 408 X 408 X Allows up to five messages to be grouped together into a single transmission with its own identi fication number For example 05 07 134 16 64 01 identification number PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 734 AA MSG MATCH 01 If an AA card is fitted the following display will appear 01 2 Dial the desired MSG identification link number AA MSG 01 01 64 e g 05 05 OR Press UP or DOWN to select and press RIGHT soft key 3 Dial MSG numbers 01 64 recorded in AA card AA MSG MATCH 01 up to 5 054 07 13 164 64 OR Press UP or DOWN to select and press RIGHT soft key MMC will automatically insert as a delimiter
207. next position For example if the sensor name is FIRE press the number 3 three times to get the letter F Now press the number 4 three times to get the letter I and so on to complete the name Press the pro grammable A key to toggle between upper and lower case text Tip When the character you want is on the same key as the previous character you typed in press the UP key to move the cursorto the right then selectthe character The key can be used for the following special characters in sequence of key presses PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry A Key 19 24B keyset or key 7 12B keyset or key 1 6B keyset toggles upper case and lower case text ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 213 351 ALARM NAME Display shows e g 351 for Compact Il 2 Dial ALARM e g 351 for Compact Il or 3502 351 ALARM NAME for DCS OR Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Enter name using method described above and 351 ALARM NAME press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 FIRE 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data None Related Items MMC 212 Alarm Ringing Station MMC 213 DCS Co mpact II Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PRO
208. ng by the system administra tor If programming is not opened and an attempt is made to access a customer level MMC the error message NOT PERMIT will be displayed A four digit passcode is required to enable cus tomer programming which can be changed in MMC 201 if required Each digit can be 0 9 When opened this MMC allows access to all MMCs specified by the system installer in MMC 802 Customer Access MMC Number PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Select open or closed KEYPAD Used to enter passcode SPEAKER Save data and advance to next MMC TRSF Exit Programming ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press TRSF 200 ENABLE CUS PROG Display shows PASSCODE 2 Enter passcode ENABLE CUS PROG PASSCODE xxx Correct code shows ENABLE CUS PROG DISABLE Incorrect code shows ENABLE CUS PROG PASSWORD ERROR 3 Dial 1 for ENABLE or 0 for DISABLE ENABLE CUS PROG OR ENABLE Press UP or DOWN arrow key to select ENABLE or DISABLE and press RIGHT soft key 4 Press SPEAKER to advance to MMC entry level and 212 ALARM RING press UP or DOWN key to select MMC e g 212 SELECT PROG ID OR Enter MMC number and press RIGHT soft key to enter MMC 5 Press TRSF key to exit DefaultData DISABLE closed Passcode 1234 Related Items MMC 201 Change Customer Passcode MMC 501 System Wide Timers MMC 802 Customer Access MMC Number MMC 200 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 201 CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE Use
209. ngth of the ring cycle when alarm reminder is set at a station ATT RECALL The length of time a transfer recall will ring at a station before recalling the operator AUTO REDIAL INT Controls the time between attempts after RETRY dialling is set on a station AUTO REDIAL RLS Controls the duration of a Ring No Answer condition on a retry number dialled before the auto redial is automatically cancelled BARGE IN TONE INT Controls the interval between the tones sent to the station being barged in on CALLBACK NO ANS Controls the time before the callback is automatically cancelled when a call back detects Ring No Answer CAMP ON RECALL Controls how long a camped on call will stay at a destination before recalling to the transferring station MMC 501 Page 3 of 6 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 CLIP DISPLAY The amount of time that the Calling Line ID information remains on the keyset s dis play While on a trunk conversation users are allowed to review received CLIP by pressing SCROLL gt CLIP soft key but LCD will automatically go back to trunk conversation status on expiration of this timer CLIP MSG RECEIVE The amount of time that the system will allow a valid message from the C O C O CLEAR The length of time a Direct Trunk Select key remains busy after cleardown CO CONFIRM After this time the outgoing call is disconnected or you can hear the confirm tone C O C O DISCONNECT Monitors the
210. nk group 05 calling 092 TRKGRP06 Trunk group 06 calling 093 TRKGRPO7 Trunk group 07 calling 094 TRKGRP08 Trunk group 08 calling 095 TRKGRPO9 Trunk group 09 calling 096 TRKGRP10 Trunk group 10 calling 097 TRKGRP11 Trunk group 11 calling 098 UNCO CNF CO to CO conference 099 VM AREC Voice mail automatic call record 100 VM AME Voice mail answering machine emulation 101 VM REC Voice mail manual call record 102 VM 5 01 Voice mail station 01 103 VM STNO2 Voice mail station 02 104 VM STN03 Voice mail station 03 105 VM 5 04 Voice mail station 04 106 VM 5 05 Voice mail station 05 107 VM 5 06 Voice mail station 06 108 VM 5 07 Voice mail station 07 109 VM 5 08 Voice mail station 08 110 111 Not used 112 ABSENCE Absence 2 COMPACT cos FEATURE LIST BY OPTION NUMBER 000 AA CALER Auto answer control by caller 001 ALM CLR Alarm sensor ring answer 002 AUTO RDL Retry on busy 003 CALLBACK Callback 004 CLIP ABN CLIP abandoned 005 CLIP INQ CLIP inquiry for review 006 CLIP INV CLIP investigate 007 CONFER Conference 008 DALM CLR DISA alarm ring clear 009 DAY NIG Change day night mode 010 DIRECT Directory dial 012 DND Do Not Disturb MMC 701 Page 3 of 7 DCS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL 013 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062
211. nt CALL COST RATE System returns to step 2 110 gt 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data UNIT COST PER MP 200 pence CALL COST RATE 100 percent Related Items MMC 110 Station On Off MMC 414 MPD PRS Signal MMC 508 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 509 C 0 TONE CADENCE bes X c v cm x 816 X 408i X 408 Allows customising of the tone cadence provided from the analogue trunk on a system wide ba sis There are three types of tone available through this MMC The control of the tone cadence may be changed from interrupt tone to continuous tone Some DCS systems may require default settings to comply with local operating companies These tones are mainly used for performing Automatic Redial depending on call progress tones on request from internal users on a trunk call Once busy tone is detected from the Central Office the call is automatically released and is queued for redial after expiration of the Auto Redial Interval timer see MMC 501 FEATURE KEYS DIAL 0 INTERRUPT TONE DIAL 1 CONTINUOUS TONE PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC TONES BUSY TONE RINGBACK TONE DIAL TONE ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 509 CO BUSY TONE Display sho
212. o grams keys for all stations rather than individual stations All systems are provided with default functions for some keys to provide basic operation For example keys 1 and 2 are set as CALL keys by default because it is recommended that these keys should always function as CALL keys but see Note below Other keys can be programmed as described here You can use the UP and DOWN keys to scroll through the selectable functions when programming keys see table at the end of this MMC Functions can also be entered via the dial keypad For example to assign the OHVA function key number 6 can be pressed three times If the BOSS function is required press 2 twice for the first letter B and then use the UP or DOWN key to change the selection from BARGE to BOSS Note Default key functions are different for 408 408i systems compared to all other systems For example keys 1 and 2 notsetas CALL keys by default as these are not required Programming in MMC 723 is also done on the basis of keyset type 12 button 24 button etc TYPE OF SET Dial DCS CII 816 408 408i 0 24BTN 24 BTN 1 12BTN ee BTN EURO 2 6BTN 12 BTN 6 Li 4 amp 8TNAOMS 25874 SEI esm 6 2881N eee wm PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear
213. o Alarm UCD CS Level 1 UCD CS Level 2 Que e wird Related Items MMC 501 System Wide Timers MMC 500 Page 2 of 2 MMC PROGRAMS NOVEMBER 2001 DISPLAY ALARM REM CNTER 05 gt UCDS VISUAL ALARM 00 _ UCDS VISUAL ALARM 00 02 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 501 SYSTEM WIDE TIMERS Allows the adjustment of individual system timers as necessary Some timers can be disabled by setting the time to all zeros 000 PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 501 AA INT DGT TIME Display shows first timer value 05SEC gt 2 Press UP or DOWN key to select timer e g KMMC KMMC LOCK OUT TM Lock Out and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 30SEC gt 3 Enter new value using keypad KMMC LOCK OUT TM If valid system returns to step 2 30 SEC 255 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data See table of timers and values below Related Items None MMC 501 Page 1 of 6 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 Timers Note that some timers apply only to certain systems These are indicated in the list TIMER NAME DEFAULT RANGE AA INT DGT not 408 4081 05 SEC 1 25 SEC NO ACT not 408 4081 10 SEC 1 25 SEC AA
214. o the setting of the DDI table P M NOR When BRI line is point to multipoint configuration and is not an MSN line In coming calls are placed as set in MMC 406 Trunk Ring Assignment P M MSN When BRI line is point to multipoint configuration and is an MSN line The sys tem can manage up to eight MSN numbers for each MSN BRI access Incom ing calls through RMP MSN ports are handled as set in MMC 421 MSN Digit Each BRI access requires its own table P P NOR When BRI line is point to point configuration and is not a DDI line Incoming calls are placed as setin MMC 406 Trunk Ring Assignment e CHANNEL ANY This field can be set to YES or NO and is referenced when a user attempts an outgoing call while that port is busy If CHANNEL ANY is NO user hears busy tone If CHANNEL ANY is YES the system checks if the adjacent port another B channel in the same BRI access is free If itis free the user can call through that port Otherwise the user hears busy tone DLSEND This field is provided to set the dial sending mode to enblock or overlap on an individual port basis BRI CODING A LAW or U LAW A LAW in UK Note Any change to BRI MODE option is effective only after restart ofthe BRI card Use MMC 418 Card Re start to restart the card MMC 419 Page 1 of 3 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 Ports Programmed as STATION in MMC 423 Display shows BRI STN Items to select include s
215. oard switch select internal external The default directory number of a background music source is 371 Note Internal music is always the odd numbered address e g 371 3701 3703 PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 408 701 TRK MOH Display shows current setting MOH SOURCE TONE 2 Dial trunk number e g 704 704 TRK MOH OR MOH SOURCE TONE Use UP or DOWN to Scroll through trunk numbers and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor OR OR ALL TRK MOH Press ANS RLS to select ALL MOH SOURCE 3 Enter source number 0 3701 704 TRK MOH OR MOH SOURCE 3701 Press UP or DOWN key to select option Press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 above 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data TONE Related Items MMC 308 Assign Background Music Source MMC 408 Page of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 409 TRUNK STATUS READ This is a read only MMC Allows the status of trunks to be read in a format that will enable the servicing personnel to quickly identify the ownership and position of a trunk OPTIONS 00 708 Night Toll Restriction Day Ring Destination 09 Day R
216. ode of one port all other ports must be set to the same dial sending mode If your PRI line is not registered for DDI service at the Central Office you can use NORMAL service e g subaddress or normal trunk incoming service If you set PRI MODE to DDI you can service DDI Direct Dial Inward to a spe cific station or station group according to DDI NUMBER TABLE There is also a CHANNEL ANY option If set to YES when a call is initiated the channel used is specified by the network if set to NO when call is initiated the DCS Compact II will specify which channel to use PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYP AD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 420 701 PRI OPTION Display shows CHANNEL ANY YES 2 Dial PRI trunk number e g 704 704 PRI OPTION OR CHANNEL ANY YES Press UP or DOWN key to select the port Press the RIGHT soft key to move the cursor 3 Press UP or DOWN key to make selection CHANNEL 704 PRI OPTION ANY PRI MODE or DLSEND and press RIGHT soft DLSEND OVERLAP key to move the cursor 4 Use UP or DOWN key to make selection 704 PRI OPTION and press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 DLSEND ENBLOCK 5 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data CHANNEL ANY YES PRI MODE DD
217. of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 504 PULSE MAKE BREAK RATIO bes j cm v 816 V 408i X 408 V Allows the value of pulses per second and the duration of the make break time to be changed This only affects rotary dial trunks FEATURE KEYS Dial 0 Make Break ratio 01 99 Dial 1 Pulse Per Second 10 or 20 PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 504 MAKE BREAK RATIO Display shows 33 MAKE 2 DialO or 1 for option e g 1 PULSE PER SECOND OR 10 PPS _ Press UP or DOWN key for selection and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Dial in new value e g 20 and system returns to step 2 PULSE PER SECOND 10 PPS gt 20 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data Make Break 33 Pulses Per Second 10 Related Items MMC 402 Trunk Dial Type MMC 504 Page of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 505 ASSIGN DATE AND TIME Allows the system clock date and time to be set FEATURE KEYS W Day 0 6 0 SUN 1 MON 2 TUE 3 WED 4 THU 5 FRI 6 SAT MM Month 01 12 DD Date 01 31 YY Year 00 99 e g 02 for 2002 HH Hour 00 23 00 59 PROGRAM KEYS KEYPAD Used to ente
218. ome or all of the following CHANNEL ANY POWER FEED see note and BRI CODING CHANNEL ANY See above POWER FEED This field determines if power to a BRI access will be supplied YES or NO Note 1 Any change to The Power Feed option is effective only after restarting the BRI card Use MMC 418 to restart the card 2 Only DCS excluding Compact I andCompact Il systems provide a Power Feed option to the 50 In terface See Table 1 in the SO Overview section of this manual Part 3 Special Applications BRI CODING A LAW or U LAW A LAW in UK In BRI STN options DLSEND and BRI MODE are not included because the system uses implicit data for these enblock for DLSEND and P MP for BRI MODE PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 419 701 BRFTRK Display shows CHANNEL ANY YES OR 701 5 CHANNEL ANY YES 2 Dial BRI trunk number e g 703 OR Press UP or DOWN key to select the port For TRUNK ports TRK go to step 3 a For STATION ports STN go to step 3 b 3 a Display is as shown for TRUNK ports 703 BRFTRK Use the RIGHT soft key to position the cursor under CHANNEL ANY YES CHANNEL ANY MMC 419 Page 2 of 3 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 20
219. on 1CH 5USER 40BIN Press RIGHT soft key to make selection 4 Enter 0 forNO or 1 for YES 3552 VDIALER OPTN OR CLEAR RAM NO Press UP and DOWN key to view selection Press RIGHT soft key to make selection 3552 VDIALER OPTN CLEAR RAM YES 5 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data 2CH 7USER 20BIN Related Items MMC 216 Voice Dialler Assignments MMC 722 Station Key Programming MMC 723 System Key Programming MMC 724 Dial Numbering Plan Keyset User Guide MMC 215 DCS Compact II Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 216 VOICE DIALLER ASSIGNMENTS Epes 7 a V cu 7 sie x 40s x 408 X Allows a station to be assigned to a channel of the VDIAL card to dial a personal speed dial number The number of users assigned to this feature is controlled by MMC 215 Voice Dialler Options which allows either two 2 channels with seven 7 users or one 1 channel with five 5 users PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 216 355 VDIALER USER Display shows DCS 23551 Compact 11 355 USER 1 NONE e g 355 2 Enter Voice Dialler number e g 356 via dial keypad 356 VDIALER USER OR USER 1 NONE
220. one burst of the selection will be heard when a key is pressed PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 111 201 RING TONE Display shows SELECTION 5 2 Dial keyset number e g 205 205 RING TONE OR SELECTION 5 Press UP or DOWN to select station and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor OR ALL RING TONE Press ANS RLS to select SELECTION 3 Dial 1 8 to select ring tone 205 RING TONE OR SELECTION 6 Press UP or DOWN to select ring tone and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data SELECTION 5 Related Items MMC 114 Station Volume MMC 111 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 112 ALARM REMINDER Allows the system administrator to set or change the alarm clock appointment reminder feature for any station Keyset users can set their own alarms A number of alarms may be set for each station three 1 3 for DCS systems or two 1 2 for Compact Il 816 and 408 408i systems Each alarm may be defined as a one time or TODAY alarm or as a DAILY alarm or NOTSET as described below The TODAY darm is automatically cancelled after it rings wh
221. or SND option you can select the CLIP display option from 0 CO Tel 1 Extn Number 2 Extn No 3 DID Number ACTION 1 Open programming and select 312 Display shows 2 Dial station number e g 205 OR Press UP or DOWN to select station and press right soft key to move cursor OR Press ANS RLS to select all 3 Dial 0 NO or 1 YES to select RCV option e g 1 OR Press UP or DOWN to select option and press right soft key to move cursor to SND field 4 Dial 0 NO or 1 YES to select SND option e g 1 OR Press UP or DOWN to select option and press right soft key If you selected YES for SND option display shows Dial 0 3 to select INFO option OR Press UP or DOWN to select Press RIGHT soft key MMC 312 Page 1 of 2 DISPLAY 201 ALLOW CLIP RCV YES SND YES 205 ALLOW CLIP RCV YES SND YES OR ALL ALLOW CLIP RCV YES SND YES 205 ALLOW CLIP RCV YES SND YES 205 ALLOW CLIP RCV YES SND YES 205 ALLOW CLIP INFO C O Tel DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to save and advance to next MMC Default Data RCV YES SND YES INFO CO Tel Related Items MMC 119 Set CLIP Display MMC 312 Page 2 of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 313 ASSIGN PIN CODE pcs xX c 7 x s16 x 408 X 408 Assigns individual users to PIN codes in the system For Cable amp
222. ows NORMAL PORT 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 VMAA PORT OR NORMAL PORT Press UP or DOWN to select station and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Dial 1 or 0 to select port type 12 VMAA 02 NORMAL 205 VMAA PORT OR VMAA PORT Press UP or DOWN to select option and press RIGHT soft key 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data NORMAL PORT Related Items MMC 601 Assign Station Group MMC 726 VM AA Options MMC 207 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 208 ASSIGN RING TYPE Provides the flexibility to program 5175 to have ICM ringing ringing and data secure With the many types of external ringing devices all configurations can be met DATA RING also has a positive disconnect signal Do not make VM AA ports data this will return them to a single line port and stop voice mail integration OPTIONS 0 ICM RING 1 C O RING 2 DATA RING PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 208 209 RING TYPE Display shows ICM RING 2 Dial SLT station number e g 205 205 RING TYPE OR ICM RING Press UP or DOWN to select station and press RIGHT soft key to move curso
223. play so you can try again PASSCODE ERROR 3 Enter1to enable or enter 0 to disable ENABLE TECH PROG OR ENABLE 1 Press UP or DOWN to select ENABLE TECH PROG ENABLE DCS only Press RIGHT soft key to move to tenant number and enter tenant number 1 2 ENABLE TECH PROG ENABLE TENANT 2 Jg 20 20 gt lt MMC 800 Page 1 of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 4 Press SPEAKER to advance to MMC entry level 801 55 SELECT PROG ID 5 Enterthe MMC required and begin programming Follow the instructions for that MMC Disabling Closing Programming Mode If you wish to immediately close programming mode when you have finished programming Return to MMC 800 The display shows that programming is enabled Use the UP or DOWN key to select DISABLE and press TRSF to exit If you do not close programming using MMC 800 programming mode will be automatically disabled if you do not carry out any programming tasks within the time set in the system timer KMMC LOCK OUT see MMC 501 System Wide Timers Default Data DISABLE closed Passcode 4321 Related Items None MMC 800 Page 2 of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 801 CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE Used to change the passcode which allows access to MMC 800 Enable Technician Program from its current value Note The passcode is four digits long The
224. ports Each number can be as signed to only one port However a port can have more than one number That is two ISDN terminals with the same MSN number cannot exist in different LT S ports Each 50 bus must be terminated with a 1000 termination resistor The original BRI cards did not have this resistor However it is fitted to cards manufactured from mid 1997 It is important that this termination is present on each installation and should be checked by the installer Note 1 In BRI LT T and LT S mode can be selected only by MMC programming However you should connect the Tx and Rx cable pair from the MDF correctly Tx and Rx connections are reversed between LT T and LT S mode see Table 15 2 If you are connecting a TO port to an NT take care if there is a termination present some where other than on the BRI card on the bus ISDN Services Outgoing calls when origination party is non So terminal When an extension seizes an ISDN TRK or So terminal attached to the system the ISDN bearer capability BC and high layer compatibility HLC will be coded as in Table 2 ORIGINATION DGP Digital keyphone Telephony SLT ICM CO ring in MMC 208 3 1 kHz Audio Telephony SLT DATA ring in MMC 208 3 1 kHz Audio Telephony Table 2 Coding of BC HLC when an extension seizes an ISDN TRK or SO terminal Incoming calls when destination party is non So terminal When an incoming call is present on the ISDN or So port the call wil
225. pplier If you do not change the defaults you will not be able to register handsets Once you have entered your new System ID and Auth Code using this MMC you can then begin registering your handsets with the Auth Code The system checks the Auth Code entered for each handset against the DECT Auth Code If it is the same the registration procedure contin ues otherwise the DCS rejects the registration procedure Caution Only the system administrator and or installer should be allowed access to change the DECT System Code and register handsets PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 737 DECT SYSTEM CODE Display shows AUTH CODE FFFF 2 Press RIGHT soft key to move cursor and enter AUTH DECT SYSTEM CODE CODE via dial keypad eg 1234 AUTH CODE 1234 3 Press RIGHT soft key and press VOL UP or DOWN to DECT SYSTEM CODE select SYSTEM ID SYSTEM ID 000 4 Press RIGHT soft key to move cursor and enter SYS DECT SYSTEM CODE TEM ID via dial keypad eg 567 SYSTEM ID 567 5 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data Auth Code FFFF System ID 000 These values must be changed by the installer MMC 737 DCS Compact II Page 1 of 2 DCS COMBINED PROGRAMMIN
226. r 3 Dial 0 1 or 2 to select port type e g 2 205 RING TYPE OR DATA RING Press UP or DOWN to select option and press LEFT or RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 above 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data ICM RING Related Items None MMC 208 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 209 ASSIGN ADD ON MODULE pcs V a V cu v V 408i X 408 X Designates to which station an add on module AOM is assigned PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right RELEASE Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Clears previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 209 301 AOM MASTER Display shows first AOM MASTER NONE 2 Dial AOM number 301 AOM MASTER OR MASTER NONE Press UP or DOWN to scroll through AOM numbers and press RIGHT soft key to move the cursor 3 Enter station number e g 201 301 AOM MASTER OR MASTER 201 Press UP or DOWN to select station numbers 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data MASTER NONE Related Items None MMC 209 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 210 CUSTOMER ON OFF Allows the system administrator to set system features on or off Not all features are ava
227. r selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry A Key 19 24B keyset or key 7 12B keyset or key 1 6B keyset toggles upper case and lower case text ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 602 501 SGR NAME Display shows 2 Dialgroup number e g 505 505 SGR NAME OR Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press LEFT or RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Enterthe name using method described above 505 SGR NAME SAMSUNG 4 Press LEFT or RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 OR Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data None Related Items MMC 104 Station Name MMC 404 Trunk Name MMC 600 Assign Operator Group MMC 601 Assign Station Group MMC 602 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 603 ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP Allows the assignment of trunks to a specific trunk group or to several trunk groups This is very useful for programming of LCR when more than one trunk is to be in several dialling plans There are two different modes of operation 1 sequential and 2 distribute WARNING One trunk can appear in more than one trunk group If necessary delete the trunk member from other groups to prevent accidental access The number of trunk groups is DCS and Compact II 11 valid groups 9 and 80 89 816 Fo
228. r selections SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 505 010 1110299 1147 Display shows system date and time NEW WMMDDYY HHMM 2 Enter new date and time using above table OLD 1110299 1147 NEW 3110501 1445 3 Verify time and date OLD 3110501 1445 Reenter if necessary NEW WMMDDYY HHMM 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data Follows software version release date Related Items None MMC 505 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 506 TONE CADENCE Sets and changes tone cadences on a system wide basis There are 14 tones available as listed below Tones can be set to interrupt or continuous and interrupt tone cadences can be cus tomised Some systems may require default settings to comply with local operating companies FEATURE KEYS DIAL 0 INTERRUPT TONE DIAL 1 CONTINUOUS TONE PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC TONES BUSY TONE Busy tone CONFM BARGE Confirm tone and Barge in tone DIAL TONE Dial tone DND NO MORE DND tone and No More Call key tone ERROR TONE Error tone HOLD CAMPON Hold tone and Camp on tone MSGWAT TONE Message waiting tone RGBACK TONE Ringback tone RING TONE Ring over page tone to exter
229. ress RIGHT soft key 8 Enter 1 for ACCEPT or 0 for REJ ECT for Option OR Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key 9 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data None Related Items MMC 419 BRI Option Open programming and select 421 Display shows MMC 420 PRI Option MMC 421 Page 2 of 2 MMC PROGRAMS NOVEMBER 2001 2 79 gt lt 701 MSN DGT 1 DGT 704 MSN DGT 1 DGT 704 MSN DGT 4 DGT _ 704 MSN 4 DGT 4603881 704 MSN DGT 4 gt D 204 704 MSN DGT 4 D 204 202 704 MSN DGT 4 CW NO OPT ACEPT 704 MSN DGT 4 CW NO OPT ACEPT DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 422 ASSIGN TRUNK COS Used to assign day and night class of service COS to each trunk For DCS and Compact II systems there 30 01 30 different classes of service For 816 systems there 10 01 10 For 408 408i systems there are four 1 4 These are defined in MMC 701 Assign COS Contents According to the assigned COS an outside caller to the system via a DISA line without a pass code may have restricted access to system features PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTIO
230. ress ANS RLS for all trunks and press RIGHT soft key ALL TRK ON OFF to move cursor to options 1A2 EMULATE 3 Dial option number from above list 0 3 e g 2 704 TRK ON OFF OR TRK FORWARD ON Press UP or DOWN key to select option and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 4 Dial1forON for OFF 704 TRK ON OFF OR TRK FORWARD OFF Press UP or DOWN key to select ON OFF and press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 5 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data 1A2 EMULATE Off TRUNK INC DND Off TRUNK FORWARD On LCR ALLOW Off Related Items None MMC 400 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 401 C O PBXLINE Used to select the mode of the C O line If PBX mode is chosen this allows PBX access codes to be recognised thus allowing more complete toll restriction call barring This mode is signed on a per trunk basis If a trunk requires the use of the RECALL key it must be set to PBX mode Options are 0 CO LINE 1 PBX PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 401 701 PBX LINE Display shows CO LINE 2 Dial trunk number e g 704 704 PBX LINE OR CO LINE Use UP or
231. right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 301 Display shows Dial station number e g 205 OR Press UP and DOWN to scroll through stations and press RIGHT soft key to advance to step 3 to enter Day COS OR Press UP and DOWN to scroll through stations and press LEFT soft key to advance to step 4 to enter Night COS OR Press ANS RLS to select all stations Enter day class of service e g 05 OR Press UP and DOWN to scroll through classes of service and press RIGHT soft key to advance to step 4 to enter Night COS OR Press UP and DOWN to scroll through classes of service and press LEFT soft key to return to step 2 to enter other stations Enter night class of service e g 05 OR Press UP and DOWN to scroll through classes of service and press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 to enter other stations OR Press UP and DOWN to scroll through classes of service and press LEFT soft key to return to step 3 Press TRSF to save and exit OR Press SPEAKER to save and advance to next MMC Default Data Day class 01 or 1 Night class 01 or 1 Related Items MMC 701 Assign COS Contents MMC 301 Page 1 of 1 201 STN COS DAY 01 NIGHT 01 205 STN COS DAY 01 NIGHT 01 OR ALL STN COS DAY NIGHT 205 STN COS DAY 05 NIGHT 01 205 STN COS DAY 05 05 DCS MMC PROG
232. rsor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 510 1 STN RING 1000 Display shows 3000 1000 3000 2 Dial option 1 5 e g 2 2 RING 0400 OR 0200 0400 3000 Press UP or DOWN key to select and press RIGHT soft key 3 Enter new value s for cadence 4 digits per value 2 TRK RING 0400 as required 0200 0400 2000 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data On Off On Off 1 1000 3000 1000 3000 2 0400 0200 0400 3000 3 0400 0100 0400 2000 4 0200 0200 0200 2000 5 0200 0200 0200 4000 Related Items None MMC 510 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 511 MW LAMP CAD Cadence pcs 7 c x cm v gio X 408 X 408 X Sets the cadence for the message waiting LED on single line telephones for systems which have a message waiting card installed PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 511 MW LAMP CADENCE Display shows ON 1000 OFF 1000 2 Enter value for ON followed by value for OFF MW LAMP CADENCE enter all four digits ON 2000 OFF 2000 3 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next
233. rts only basic call functions are provided you cannot use other functions transfer forward hold etc from an LT S terminal However a DGP can transfer forward a call to an LT S terminal Other features conference hold etc operate in a similar way There is no COS check for an LT S port Pin Assignment of Connectors PRI PRI card has one RJ 45 connector with the pin assignments shown in Table10 Table 10 Pin assignments of RJ 45 at customer premises side for PRI BRI Champ connector DCS Function Colour Colour Function Tx of P1 Tx of P1 Rx of P1 Rx of P1 Tx of P2 Tx of P2 Rx of P2 Rx of P2 Tx of P3 Tx of P3 Rx of P3 Rx of P3 Tx of P4 Tx of P4 Rx of P4 Rx of P4 Table 11 Champ es pin assignment Note Tx and Rx has no polarity 3 16 DCS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL Compact Function Colour Colour Function Tx ofP1 Rx of P1 Tx of P2 Rx of P2 Tx of P3 Rx of P3 Tx of P4 Rx of P4 Table 12 Champ connector pin assignment Compact I SPECIAL APPLICATIONS NOVEMBER 2001 Note Table 12 is based on expansion slot 1 of Compact I Tx and Rx has no polarity Compact Il Function Colour Colour Function TxofP1 RxofP1 Tx of P2 Rx of P2 Tx of P3 Rx of P3 Tx of P4 Rx of P4 Tx of P1 Rx of P1 Tx of P2 Rx of P2 Tx of P3 Rx of P3 Tx of P4 Rx of P4 Table 13 Champ connector pin assignment Compact Il Note Table 13 is based on expansion slot
234. s SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data None Related Items MMC 116 Alarm and Message MMC 113 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 114 STATION VOLUME Allows the system administrator to set volume levels for keysets 0 RING VOLUME Set a level for ring volume There are eight volume levels level 1 is the lowest and level 8 the highest 1 OFF RING VOL Set a level for off hook ring volume There are eight volume levels level 1 is the lowest and level 8 the highest 2 HANDSET VOL Set a level for listening volume through handset There are eight vol ume levels level 1 is the lowest and level 8 the highest 3 SPEAKER VOL Set a level for listening volume through speaker There are 16 vol ume levels level 1 is the lowest and level 16 the highest 4 BGM VOLUME Set a level for background music volume There are 16 volume lev els level 1 is the lowest and level 16 the highest PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 114 201 STN VOLUME Display shows RING VOLUME 4 2 Dial station number e g 205 205 STN VOLUME RING VOLUME 4 3 Dial option number 205 STN VOLUME OR OFF RING VOL 4 Press UP or DOWN to select option and press RIGHT soft key 4
235. s this value RANGE 0 25 UCDS AUDIO Used to set the Audio Alarm threshold It is triggered when the ALARM number of calls waiting to be answered in the UCD group reaches this value RANGE 0 25 5 UCDS VISUAL Used to set the Visual Alarm threshold It is triggered when the ALARM number of calls waiting to be answered in the UCD group 7 UCD CS LEVEL 1 Provides call wait indication level 1 if number of calls waiting to be answered in UCD group reaches this value RANGE 0 25 UCD CS LEVEL 2 Provides call wait indication level 2 if number of calls waiting to be answered in UCD group reaches this value RANGE 0 25 Options 5 8 are not available on 408 408i systems PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL MMC 500 Page of 2 DCS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL ACTION 1 Open programming and select 500 Display shows 2 Enternumber from above list e g 6 OR Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Enter in new value via dial keypad If entry is valid system will return to step 2 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data Alarm Reminder Auto Redial DISA Call DISA Lock New Call UCDS Visual Alarm UCDS Audi
236. s within numbering plan for a station or station group Toggles YES or NO if YES then the call will be camped on at busy destination while NO gives busy indication Accept the selected destination party will be alerted Reject the call is cleared Note For each BRI access two adjacent ports are assigned You need only change the value for one of the two ports the value for the other port will be changed automatically PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN KEYPAD SOFT KEYS SPEAKER HOLD Used to scroll through options Used to enter selections Move cursor left and right Used to store data and advance to next MMC Used to clear previous entry MMC 421 Page 1 of 2 DCS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL ACTION 1 2 Enter trunk number e g 704 OR Press UP or DOWN key to scroll through ports and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Enterthe location 1 8 e g 4 OR Press UP or DOWN to select location and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 4 Enter digits to be translated e g 4603881 via dial key pad and press RIGHT soft key to move to the destination selection Max digits is 10 5 Enter day destination via dial keypad e g 204 OR Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key 6 Enter night destination via dial keypad e g 202 OR Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key 7 Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO for Call Waiting OR Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and p
237. scroll to number 3 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data WARNING DESTINATION 500 Related Items MMC 500 System Wide Counters Alarm Reminder Counter option Cadence programming SVMi 4 programming MMC 753 DCS Compact II Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 754 VM HALT Cadence amp SVMi 4 pcs V a x 7 s16 x 4081 X 408 X Used to take the Cadence or SVMi 4 card off line This MMC ensures that there no calls on the card when it is taken off line You cannot halt the card using MMC 810 Halt Processing PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 754 VM HALT Display shows STATUS PROC 2 Dial 1 to halt HALT or 0 not to halt PROC VM HALT OF STATUS HALT Press UP or DOWN key to select Press RIGHT soft key 3 Press UP or DOWN key to select YES or NO VM HALT YES will take the card offline ARE YOU SURE YES Press RIGHT soft key 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data None Related Items Cadence programming SVMi 4 programming MMC 754 DCS Compact II Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANU
238. select entry and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Enter LCR digit string via the dial keypad and press LCR DIGIT 005 RIGHT soft key DIGIT 305426 OR Press LEFT soft key to return to step 1 4 Enter digit length 00 31 LCR DIGIT 005 Cursor will move to RT route selection LENGTH 10 RT 01 Enter RT 1 16 OR Press LEFT soft key to return to length value Valid entry will return you to step 1 5 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data Depends on software version Related Items MMC 210 Customer On Off MMC 400 Customer On Off Per Trunk MMC 711LCR Time Table MMC 712 LCR Route Table MMC 713 LCR Modify Digit Table MMC 710 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 711 LCR TIME TABLE This table gives flexibility to the system through the LCR ROUTES to allow calls placed at any given time of day to use the least cost trunk route that is available When LCR ROUTE ADVANCE is allowed it is possible for calls to be placed on more expensive trunks on any given time of day There are four possible time entries per day the start time of the next time period is the end time of the previous time period PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry FEATURE KEYS
239. t lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt m m Y 2 8 6 2 3 System Configuration Quick Reference AA Translation tables 1 amp 2 entries Account codes 500 250 200 200 Authorisation codes 250 100 100 Classes of Service COS 10 200 200 200 DDI entries 20 O DECT ports LCR Digit Table max entries MOH port numbers Operator Groups part of Staton Group Operator Group members sequential dis tributed ring Operator Group members unconditional ring 3 2 _ x 3 3 9 01 2 3 System Configuration Quick Reference cont d Description Compact Compact II 86 Speed dials total 500 500 300 Speed dials system max 500 500 500 300 200 Station Group members sequential dis 30 30 16 tributed ring ring UCD Groups 10 10 N A N A Voice dial card port numbers N A N A N A Notes IMisc 2 card 381 4 AA card 2 381 6 both cards installed 381 90 UCD Group can be created from any Station Group 501 529 CI or last 10 Station Groups 520 529 DCS 3UCD Group can only be created from last 10 Station Groups 510 519 UCD Group can only be created from lastthree Station Groups 507 509 DCS SPECIAL APPLICATIONS COMBINED
240. t MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 407 701 TRK RELS Display shows RELEASE Y 1 N 0 2 Dial in trunk number e g 704 704 TRK RELS Press DOWN key selected trunk and press right soft key OR Press ANS RLS to select all trunks 3 Dial 1forYES or 0 for NO e g 1 704 TRK RELS RELEASE Y 1 N 0 System returns to step 2 ALL TRK RELS RELEASE Y 1 N 0 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data None Related Items MMC 603 Assign Trunk Group MMC 407 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 408 ASSIGN TRUNK MUSIC ON HOLD SOURCE Allows the system administrator to select which Music On Hold MOH source can be heard on each trunk The possible selections for each music source are TONE NONE internal and exter nal customerprovided MOH source DCS Connected to a Trunk A card The default directory number of an MOH source is 37xx Compact Il There is a total of two possible music sources but this depends on whether a Misc card is in Stalled in the system One music source is provided on the base board switch select inter nal external the other external source is provided on the Misc card The default directory num ber of a background music source is 371 372 816 and 408 408i There is a music source on the base b
241. t step 2 CALL TYPE ID A valid entry consists of digits 0 9 or alpha DIRECT CALL NO characters A C See above list under CALL TYPE ID options list 11 If option 7 is selected at step 2 PROGRESS TONE ID A valid entry consists of digits 0 9 or alpha DIAL TONE NO characters A C See above list under PROGRESS TONE ID 12 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data EXT FOR DN1 Yes TRK FOR DN1 Yes EXT FOR DN2 No TRK FOR DN2 No SEPARATOR No DISCONNECT SIGNAL C CALL TYPE ID DIRECT CALL ALL FWD CALL BSY FWD CALL NOA FWD CALL RECALL DIR TRK CALL OVERFLOW DDI CALL MESSAGE CALL UI PROGRESS TONE ID No for all Related Items MMC 207 Assign VM AA Port MMC 726 Page 3 of 3 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 727 SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY This is a read only MMC Used for system card version and date display only The first display is the system ROM version Press UP or DOWN key to show versions for other cards installed Version displays take the format YY MM DD Version Where Year Month DD Day Version version number e g V1 00 PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options SPEAKER Used to advance to next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 727 ROM VERSION Display shows date and version 01 02 16 V6 25 2 Press UP or DOWN key to select other MISC VE
242. ta and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 713 LCR MODIFY 001 Display shows NOF DEL DGT 00 2 Enterindex number e g 005 LCR MODIFY 005 OR NOF DEL DGT 00 Press UP or DOWN keys to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Enternumber of digits to delete e g 2 LCR MODIFY 005 OR NOF DEL DGT 02 Press RIGHT soft key to skip step and move cursor to step 4 4 Enter digits to be inserted e g 10288 LCR MODIFY 005 OR 1 10288 Press RIGHT soft key to skip step or to store information and advance to step 5 5 Enter digits to be appended e g 45678 LCR MODIFY 005 OR 45678_ Press RIGHT soft key to skip step orto store information and return to step 2 6 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data Depends on software version Related Items MMC 710 LCR Digit Table MMC 711 LCR Time Table MMC 712 LCR Route Table MMC 713 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 714 DDI NUMBER AND TRANSLATION Epes 7 c 17 o 7 s16 v 408 V 408 X Provides a method of assigning an incoming DDI call through ISDN to a specific station If you have specified DDI service with your Network Carrier you can match each DDI number to spe cific stations using this command according to the day or night mode You also have the option when the d
243. tains all the MMC programs provided for your keyphone system presented in numerical order e The procedure described here for a particular MMC may be slightly different on your system and some LCD displays may not be exactly as shown For example port numbers may be different for the system you are programming Refer to the section System Configuration Quick Reference in Part 1 for the relevant options for your sys tem Also 408 and 408i systems employ 2 digit extension and group numbers by default unlike other systems which use 3 digit numbers by default These dialling number plans can be changed by the system installer using MMC 724 Remember that the displays shown for each MMC in this manual are provided as examples and should beused for guidance only e To identify which MMCs apply to your system either refer to the MMC lists at the beginning of this manual or locate the relevant MMC page here and referto the tick box beneath the title a tick next to the system name indicates it is applicable a cross X means itis not e The procedure described for each MMC assumes you are the installer or system administrator with system wide access via a passcode However MMCs 100 121 are also accessible to individual keyset users If you are programming your own keyset at Station level the procedure is different and you should refer to your Sam sung DCS Keyset User Guide for details e The term DCS as used in this manual i
244. tatus MMC 743 DBS Status MMC 744 BSI Registration On Off MMC 745 BSI Carrier MMC 741 DCS Compact II Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 742 BSI STATUS bes c v cm V 816 X 408 X 408 Shows the status of the BSI card ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 742 Display shows BSI STATUS SUCC For Compact Il SUCC successful if status of BSI card is good or FAIL OR OR For DCS Master S Slave not used BSI STATUS SUCC successful if status of BSI card is good or M SUCC S NONE F AIL 2 Press TRSF button to exit OR Press SPEAKER button to advance to next MMC Default Data None Related Items MMC 737 DECT System Code MMC 738 DECT Clear Registration MMC 739 BSI Download MMC 741 BSI Card Restart MMC 743 DBS Status MMC 744 BSI Registration On Off MMC 745 BSI Carrier MMC 742 DCS Compact II Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 743 DBS STATUS bes c j cm V 816 X 408i X 408 Used for checking the status of DECT base stations DBS ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 743 2 The status of each DBS is displayed If status is good 1 is displayed If status is not good 0 is displayed For DCS DBS 1 8 DBS 12345678 STS 11101100 OR OR For Compact Il DBS 1 3 DBS STATUS 1 1 2 1 3 0 3 Press TRSF b
245. ternal page zones is required a station group containing all four zone codes must be created PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter DN of selected device SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 203 ASSIGN UA PORT Display shows current assignment NONE NO UA 2 Dial DN of UA device e g 205 ASSIGN UA PORT OR 205 STATION Use UP and DOWN keys to scroll through available devices 3 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data None Related Items MMC 204 Common Bell Control MMC 219 Common Relay Service Type MMC 601 Assign Station Group MMC 605 Assign External Page Zone MMC 203 Pages 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 204 COMMON BELL CONTROL Determines whether the common bell relay contacts have an interrupted or continuous closure when activated If interrupted is chosen the relay follows an internal ring pattern of one second closed followed by three seconds open By default all common bell relay pairs are assigned as DCS 380x Compact Il 363 365 816 362 408 and 408i 361 PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and s
246. ther station PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 316 201 CPY USABLE Display shows FROM NONE 2 Enter destination station number e g 205 205 CPY USABLE OR FROM NONE Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Enter the source station number e g 210 205 CPY USABLE OR FROM 210 Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data NONE Related Items MMC 304 Assign Station Trunk Use MMC 317 Assign Station Station Use MMC 316 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 317 ASSIGN STATION STATION USE Des c x cu V 816 V 408 X 408 X Used to control whether a station can dial other stations PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY In the following example you do not want station 205 to be able to dial station 204 1 Open programming and select 317 201
247. tions KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear entry TRSF To exit programming MMC 606 Page 1 of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 606 FREE LIST 60 Display shows for example SYSTEM 20 2 Press RIGHT soft key to advance cursor to next line FREE LIST 60 SYSTEM 20 3 Press UP or DOWN key to select SYSTEM or EXT FREE LIST 60 tension SYSTEM 20 If you select EXT go to step 4 If you select SYSTEM press RIGHT soft key and enter valid number of blocks to assign OR Press UP or DOWN key to select and press RIGHT soft key OR Press HOLD to delete block s System returns to this step to make another selection If finished go to step 6 4 Enter desired EXT extension number via dial keypad FREE LIST 60 e g 205 EXT205 1 OR Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to advance cursor 5 Enter valid number for blocks 0 5 FREE LIST 60 OR EXT205 5 Press UP or DOWN key to make selection OR Press HOLD key to delete block s 6 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data System 200 entries 20 blocks 100 entries 10 blocks for 408 408 Stations One block of 10 entries Related Items MMC 705 Assign System Speed Dial MMC 706 System Speed Dial By Name MMC 606 Page
248. to return to step 2 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data NONE Related Items MMC 501 System Wide Timers Off Hook Select Timer MMC 306 Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 308 ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE Assigns a background music BGM source to keysets as follows DCS There is a total of 19 possible music selections but this is dependent on the number of Trunk A cards that are installed in the system Only one music source is provided per Trunk A card The system must have a Trunk A card installed to provide a BGM source The default direc tory number of a BGM source is 3701 3719 Internal music is always the odd numbered ad dress e g 3701 3703 Compact is a total of two possible music selections but this depends on whether a Misc card is installed in the system One music source is provided on the base board switch se lect internal external the other external source is provided on the Misc card The default direc tory number of a BGM source is 371 372 816 and 408 408i There is a music source on the base board switch select internal external The default directory number of a background music source is 371 PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC H
249. u select REPEAT by pressing the B key in the destination field dialled digits may be by passed without translating Number of Table Entries AA Trans Tables 01 and 02 can have up to 100 entries each but only 50 each on 816 systems Tables 03 12 have up to 25 entries e fyou press the A key in the destination field you can enter AA TRANS NO e If you press the B key you can enter REPEAT e f you press the C key you can enter CHANGE GREETING MESSAGE CODE e f you press the D key this takes the call to voice mail PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYP AD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 732 AA TRANS TB 01 Display shows note number of entries for table 01 001 0 500 may show as 001 or 01 etc depending on system 2 Dial TABLE number 01 12 e g 02 AA TRANS TB 02 OR 001 NONE Press UP or DOWN Press RIGHT soft key 3 Dial ENTRY number 001 100 or 01 50 AA TRANS TB 02 see Number of Table Entries above e g 002 002 NONE OR Press UP or DOWN Press RIGHT soft key 4 Enter Dial DIGIT e g 2 AA TRANS TB 02 Press RIGHT soft key 002 2 MMC 732 Page 1 of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 5 Dial Destination e g 201 AA TRANS TB 02 OR 002 2 201
250. umbered as follows DCS 500 999 Compact Il 500 999 816 500 799 408 408i 500 699 PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry B Used to insert a flash code F Used to insert a pause code D Used to insert a pulse tone conversion code C E Used to mask unmask following digits shows as or EF Used to toggle to MMC 706 and enter name for speed dial no Keys A to F are keys 19 to 24 on a 24B keyset or keys 7 to 12 on 12B keyset or keys 1 to 6 on a 6B keyset ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 705 SYS SPEED DIAL Display shows 500 2 Enterthe speed dial required e g 505 SYS SPEED DIAL OR 505 Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Enter access code e g 9 plus the phone number up SYS SPEED DIAL to 24 digits digits will scroll under 505 9 121223456789 4 Press F key to toggle to MMC 706 step 3 to enter a SYS SPEED NAME speed name for this number 505 OR Press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 to enter another speed dial number MMC 705 Page 1 of 2 DCS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL 5 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data None Related Items MMC 606 Assign Speed Block MMC 706 Syst
251. ur valid groups are 9 and 80 82 408 408i Two valid groups are 9 and 8 Valid number of members of trunk groups are DCS 01 80 Compact I 01 10 Compact Il 01 40 816 01 10 408 408i 1 4 PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 603 9 TRK GROUP Display shows e g trunk group 9 MODE SEQUENTIAL 2 Enter in valid trunk group see above e g 81 81 TRK GROUP OR MODE SEQUENTIAL Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to advance cursor 3 Press RIGHT soft key to change mode 81 TRK GROUP OR MEMBER 01 NONE Press UP or DOWN key to change mode to member 4 Press RIGHT soft key to move cursor to number of member and enter valid member number e g 04 via MEMBER 04 dial keypad OR Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor MMC 603 Page of 2 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 5 Enter valid trunk number e g 729 81 GROUP OR MEMBER 01 729 Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 6 Repeat steps 1 5 to remove trunk from group 9 or group 0 if necessary 7 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and
252. utton to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER button to store and advance to next MMC Default Data None Related Items MMC 737 DECT System Code MMC 738 DECT Clear Registration MMC 739 BSI Download MMC 741 BSI Card Restart MMC 742 BSI Status MMC 744 BSI Registration On Off MMC 743 DCS Compact II Page 1 of 1 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 744 DECT REGISTRATION ON OFF bes c j cm V 816 X 408i X 408 Allows DECT handset registration to be enabled on a keyphone system If this MMC is not opened and an attempt is made to register a DECT handset an error message will be displayed The default passcode for registration can be changed using MMC 202 Change Feature Pass codes Caution When you have finished registering handsets run this MMC again to set the regis tration mode to DISABLE This will prevent unauthorised access to this feature PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Open programming and select 744 ENABLE DECT REG Display shows PASSCODE 2 Enter passcode ENABLE DECT REG PASSCODE zteiek If the correct code is entered the display shows ENABLE DECT REG DISABLE An incorrect code entry shows ENABLE DECT REG PASSCODE ERROR If the SYSTEM ID in MMC 7
253. version selected can be changed in MMC 812 Select Country 1 4 DCS INTRODUCTION COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 1 5 2 Opening System or Customer Programming To open programming 1 Press the TRSF key 2 Enter the MMC program number 200 for Customer level programming or 800 for System level programming 3 Enter the relevant passcode 4 Press key 1 or use the VOLUME Up or Down key to select ENABLE 5 Press the SPEAKER key to have the program selection mode appear or press the TRSF key to halt programming 6 Enter the MMC number or select the program number with the Up or Down key and press the SPEAKER key When opening system programming you are advised to check MMC 812 Select Coun try to ensure that the correct country has been selected before you do any other pro gramming Carefully follow the instructions given with each MMC to program your system correctly 1 5 3 Opening Station Level Programming To open programming 1 Press the TRSF key 2 Enter the MMC program number Carefully follow the instructions given with each MMC to program your system correctly 1 5 4 Programming DC S 408 and 408i Systems Although physically similar in appearance the 408 and 4081 are different systems and may have different programming requirements and features For example the 408i sup ports ISDN whereas the 408 does not Thus an MMC relevant to one system may not be relevant to the oth
254. w programming Programming is available on any digital keyset with an LCD Programming is available only on digital telephones not analogue ones If INVALID DATA appears in the LCD while programming you should re enter the correct data When you have successfully completed an entry the LCD automatically changes for the next step Programming halts if you have not pressed a key for a certain period of time 30 sec onds by default but this can be changed Programming halts if you pick up the handset while programming If you pick up the handset while programming or the telephone plug is pulled out any new data shown in the LCD are saved IMPORTANT When installing and programming a default system for the first time The system requires that you select the correct software version for your country e g by selecting UK before you can do any other programming via either a key phone programming or a PC PCMMC programming To selectthe country 1 Press the TRSF key 2 Enter 800 followed by the default passcode 4321 The system sounds a warning and displays on the keyset ENABLE TECH PROG SELECT COUNTRY Use the VOLUME Up Down keys to selectthe country and press the RIGHT soft key The keyset displays DEFAULTING SYSTM ARE YOU SURE NO Use the VOLUME Up Down keys to select YES and press the RIGHT soft key When defaulted to the correct version you can open programming as described next The country
255. wance Table The Wild Card Table in MMC 704 appears as follows The digits 0 9 and are values that each of the wild cards X Y and Z can take This is explained later You are also unlikely to use any wild card apart from X In the Deny Table the STD code 01 has been barred to users with a B or E Toll level It may however be necessary to allow some STD codes to be dialled For example the codes 01869 01993 and 01235 are codes local to Oxford and you may want users in the Oxford area to have access to these codes with all other STD codes barred You can achieve this using the Wild Card Table and Toll Allowance Table as follows Delete entry 006 in the Deny Table and add the following entry ENTRY DIGITS B C DEF 000 01XXX i fi 9 9 and in the Toll Allowance Table make the following entries 001 01869 002 01993 003 01235 In the above table any station assigned a Toll level B C D or E will be allowed to dial only 01869 01993 and 01235 numbers but all other STD codes will be barred Stations with a Toll level F or G will be barred from dialling all STD codes The changes necessary in the Wild Card Table to implement these requirements are shown below where the Wild Card character X represents any value between 0 and 9 i e a 1 is placed in the field for any value that X is allowed to represent WILD CARD X Y Z 3 7 DCS SPECIAL APPLICATIONS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 20
256. with an individual overflow timer The overflow destination will ring whenever a call to the group is not answered If the voice mail system becomes inoperative calls are automatically routed to the overflow destination e Internal Call Forwarding to Voice Mail This option in MMC 300 provides the ability to allow or deny call forwarding of inter nal calls to voice mail This feature conserves disk drive space by only storing calls originating outside the system e One Touch Voice Mail Access One touch speed dial keys can be programmed to automatically dial log into and re trieve messages from voice mail e Call Progress Tones The only tones sent to a VM AA port are dial tone busy and ringback To eliminate confusion busy tone is substituted for DND or error tones on voice mail ports only 3 3 DCS SPECIAL APPLICATIONS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 Individual Station Page Keyphone systems were not designed to permit page announcements to individual keysets However a forced auto answer key FAUTO can be used to do this 1 Program keyset for RING in MMC 103 2 Assign a FAUTO key in MMC 722 to each keyset that is allowed to page individual keysets 3 Call another station When you hear ringback tone press the FAUTO key The ringing will stop and an Auto Answer call is set up Note To prevent the use of this feature from getting out of control only assign FAUTO keys to those keysets needing to page i
257. ws INTERRUPT TONE 2 Press UP or DOWN key to select tone CO RGBACK TONE Press LEFT soft key and advance to step 3 CONTINUOUS TONE 3 Dial 0 for INTERRUPT tone or 1 for CONTINUOUS CO RGBACK TONE tone INTERRUPT TONE OR Press UP or DOWN key to select and press RIGHT soft key 4 If you selected INTERRUPT tone dial in new value s CO RGBACK 0400 for interrupt times must be four digits each sequence 0200 0400 0200 on off on off Press RIGHT soft key to advance cursor Press LEFT soft key to retreat cursor If valid entry system returns to step 2 MMC 509 Compact I Page 1 of 2 DCS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL 5 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data Related Items Tone On Off BUSY TONE 350 350 DIAL TONE 1000 250 RINGBACK TONE 400 200 Note All times are in milliseconds None MMC 509 Compact I Page 2 of 2 350 1000 400 MMC PROGRAMS NOVEMBER 2001 Off 350 250 200 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 510 SLI RING CADENCE Used to set ring cadence for SLI ports Options are Station ring Trunk ring Door ring Alarm ring Callback ring PWN HR Cadence values are displayed the sequence off on off Contact Technical Support for advice before changing any of these values PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cu
258. y GU Go nan nan inan inan Uf Bi WwW NM Oo 3 mn 2 1 DCS MMC LIST COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 BSISTATUS DECT BASE STATION DBS STATUS 2 2 DCS DEFAULT DATA COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 2 2 Default Data STATION LOCK CHANGE USER PASSCODE CALL FO RWARD SET ANSWER MODE STATION NAME STATION SPEED DIAL KEY EXTENDER STATION STATUS DATE DISPLAY COUNTRY WESTERN CLOCK 24 HOUR DISPLAY LOWERCASE 110 STATION ON OFF AUTO HOLD OFF AUTO TIMER ON HEADSET MODE OFF HOT KEYPAD ON KEY TONE ON PAGE REJ OIN ON RING PREFERENCE ON CALL COST OFF AME BGM OFF AME PSWD OFF 10 10 102 10 104 10 10 10 10 10 0 1 3 5 6 7 8 9 KEYSET RING ALARM REMINDER VIEW MEMO NUMBER 114 STATION VOLUME RING VOL 4 OFF HOOK RING VOL 4 HANDSET VOL 4 SPEAKER VOL 13 BGM VOL 13 111 112 113 115 116 119 121 2 3 DCS DEFAULT DATA COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 er e T so Y Y Y Y Y CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODES DAY NIGHT 0000 DISA ALARM 5678 ALARM CLR 8765 AA RECORD 4321 DECT BSI REGISTER 24321 203 ASSIGN UA DEVICE 204 COMMON BELL CONTROL Y Y Y Y CONTINUOUS 205 ASSIGN LOUD BELL UNASSIGNED 206 BARGE IN TYPE Exp ps NO BARGE IN 207 ASSIGN VM AA PORT NORMAL PORT 208 ASSIGN RING TYPE ESEBESE ICM RING 209 ASSIGN ADD ON MODULE EN
259. ypad OR Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to advance cursor Enter 1 for HALT or 0 to PROC OR Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to enter data and return to step 2 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC MMC 810 Page 1 of 2 DISPLAY HALT PROCESSING C ALL S ALLSPROC HALT PROCESSING C 3 S ALL PROC HALT PROCESSING C ALL S ALLSPROC HALT PROCESSING C 3 5 5 PROC HALT PROCESSING C 3 5 5 HALT DCS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL COMPACT II amp 816 PROCEDURE ACTION 1 Open programming and select 810 Display shows 2 Enter slot number via dial keypad e g 5 OR Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to advance cursor OR Press ANS RLS to select all slots 3 Enter 1 for HALT or 0 to PROC OR Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT soft key to enter data and return to step 2 4 Press TRSF to store and exit OR Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC Default Data None Related Items None MMC 810 Page 2 of 2 MMC PROGRAMS NOVEMBER 2001 DISPLAY HALT PROCESSING SLOT NO ALLPROC HALT PROCESSING SLOT NO 5 PROC HALT PROCESSING SLOT NO ALL PROC HALT PROCESSING SLOT NO 5 DCS MMC PROGRAMS COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL NOVEMBER 2001 MMC 811 RESET SYSTEM Provides two methods of restarting the system The first method CLE

Samsung 3000 Digital Camera User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents